3747_Series_F2000_Computer_Instruction_Book_Dec62 3747 Series F2000 Computer Instruction Book Dec62
3747_Series_F2000_Computer_Instruction_Book_Dec62 3747_Series_F2000_Computer_Instruction_Book_Dec62
User Manual: 3747_Series_F2000_Computer_Instruction_Book_Dec62
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 218
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
December, 1962
Series F
APPUCATION
AND
OPERATION
LOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
MECHANISMS
AND
ADJUSTMENTS
FUTUHE USE
FEATURES
SERVICING
PROCEDURES
Subject To Change Without Notice
ELECTRICAL
REFERENCE
INFORMATION
CORRECTION
INDEX
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
CONTENTS
Application and Operation
An introduction to the equipment including general applications and a description of external features.
Logic Description
Technical details of equipment functions with block diagrams, illustrations, etc.
Mechanisms and Adjustments
Mechanisms grouped by section functions and treated by means of a detailed illustration. Description
of purpose, construction and operation of mechanisms with tests, adjustments and reasons.
Circuits
Reserved for electronic circuits.
Features
A detailed description of optional features.
Servicing Procedures
Preventive maintenance, test routines, section removal, and installation instructions.
Electrical Reference Information
Charts, diagrams, and illustrations required for maintenance and troubleshooting.
Correction Index
Items of urgent information of a technical nature released to the Field.
V
Changes or additions since last issue,
Burroughs
SERI ES F2000
COMPUTER
I
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section I
•
APPLICATION AND OPERATION
Printed in U.S.America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
2
Sec. I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPLICA TION AND OPERA TION
Page No.
3
SERIES F2000 COMPUTER ••
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4
Carriage Features ••
Operand Storage Unit
Product Accumulator
Components Unit • • •
4
METHOD OF MULTIPLICATION
6
5
5
6
... .
Speed of Multiplication
Sequence of Multiplication.
Stop Positions for Multiplication
Decimal Shift
Round -off and Clear
. . . . ..
10
KEYBOARD • • • • • •
Decimal Indicator Lamps.
C&MKeys • • • • • • •
Clear Product Accumulator Key
Power On Key • • • • • • •
Power Off Key
Negative Multiplication Lamp
Non-Multiply Key. • • • •
Carriage Control Lever. • • •
10
10
•
•
11
11
11
11
11
11
• • • •
•
12
MACHINE INTERLOCKS
, Machine Block
Column Selector Keys •
Sensimatic Control Lever
Keyboard Interlocks • • • •
TYPICA L BILLIN G OPERA TION
PROGRAMMING INFORMA TION •
7
7
8
8
9
;
.
•••••••••••••••••••••
12
12
12
12
13
16
Sec. I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
3
Burroughs Series F 2000 Computer
I
Fig. 1-1
The Series F2000 Computer is designed for
the accounting machine application which requires multiplication. With the addition of an
electro-mechanical "package" to the Basic Series
"F" Burroughs accounting machine we now have a
compact computer accounting machine wherein
the flexibility of the basic Sen sima tic and its
simplicity of operation is retained. In addition,
.1" tabulation as used on the Series FlOOO is
incorporated into the F2000 for even more flexibility. These features together with speed of
multiplication provide a fast Computer to solve
all of the multiplication encountered in Tax
Billing, Loan Scheduling, Interest Billing, Payroll, and similar accounting applications.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
The Computer is designated Series F2000.
The various styles within this series are designated by the last three digits of the style number
and refer to the style features of the basic Sensimatic machine. Style F2503, for example, includes the functional mechanism of Style F503
with, of course, the additional func tion of computing.
Features which are standard on the F2000
Computer include:
1. Carriage return by minus sign of CF "A",
carriage controlled.
2. Automatic count - column 3 carriage
controlled.
3. Crossfooter non -clear lock.
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
4
Sec. I
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
There are two major components of the
F2000 Computer: the Basic Sensimatic machine
and the computing section. Although both components operate from the same source of power, each
unit operates individually. The computing mechanism is located at the rear of the m'lchine, and
extensions of the base and case provide housing
for the additional mechanisms. Changes in the
add racks include extensions to permit transferring
results from the electro-mechanical computing
mechanism to the basic portion of the machine.
The power supply and other electrical components
are mounted to the stand proper which makes the
stand an integral part of the machine. Forced
air cooling is used to remove the extra heat
developed by the computing mechanisms.
Removal of this panel is accomplished by
moving the locking lever to the rear, grasping
the panel end plate and pulling away from the
carriage.
PANEL REMOVAL
CARRIAGE FEATURES
The 22" front feed carriage has all the
features of the Series FlOOO carriage - - including
.1" carriage tabulation mechanism, front form
guides, rear form chutes, and continous roll
journal. The latest advancement in program
panels is also incorporated in the F2000. This
new side insertion program unit includes 41 additional lanes of which 13 are used for controlling
the computing process. Seven of the additional
lanes provide control in conjunction with an auxmary sensing unit which is mounted behind and
driven by the main sensing unit. The other six
lanes are elec trical lanes which provide information to the machine as a result of pins in the
panel actuating switches located in these lanes.
The remaining lanes are for future expansion.
Fig. 1-3
After one -half of the panel is clear of the
carriage, grasp also the center rear panel rail to
aid in holding the panel when it is clear of the
machine.
PANEL REPLACEMENT
PANEL LOCK
Fig. 1-4
Fig. 1-2
Replace the panel by lining up guide channels
while holding panel parallel to floor. Push panel
towards left end of carriage until latched.
Sec. I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Ins true tion Book
OPERAND STORA GE UNIT
A, Fig. 1-5
~~~----------------------
Fig. 1-5
The Operand Storage Unit, designated as "D"
section of the machine, is located between the
"C" register section and the Product Accumulator.
Its function is to store the two different factors
for multiplication, i. e., the Multiplicand and
the Multiplier, as programmed in the carriage
contol panel. The dual construction of the "D"
section permits two amounts to be stored at the
same time. The factors stored in the "D" section
may be received from the keyboard, mechanical
accumulator storage, or from the Product Accumulator.
While being introduced into the "D" section,
the Multiplicand and lor Multiplier may be printed, non-added, added or subtracted in "A", "B"
or "C" sections in accordance with the layout.
An amount stored in the "D" section will remain
there until a Sensimatic operation in a position
programmed to enter another MP or MC. At the
beginning of this MP or MC cycle the affected
portion of the "D" section is restored to zero,
clearing out any stored up figures. If no amounts
are being indexed the "D" section "wheels" remain at zero.
PRODUCT ACCUMULA TOR
contains twenty accumulating pinions. The left
twelve pinions can be meshed with the add rack
extensions to read out the product of multiplication. The eight pinions on the right provide a
means of obtaining greater accuracy in the accumulation of fractional amounts. These eight
pinions can not be meshed with add rack extensions or read out in any other manner. For this
reason, a means is provided for cl earing these
pinions without meshing with add rack extensions.
Amounts may be accumulated in the Product
Accumulator onl y from the process of multiplication. The Product Accumulator will not receive amounts from the keyboard, a crossfooter
or a register.
The final product is transferred to the add
racks on the first Sensimatic machine cycle
following the multiplication routine and in the
same carriage position in which multiplication
has taken place. This machine cycle, which may
be initiated by a repeat of machine operation or
by the use of a motor bar, is called a "Product
Cycle." The use of a result key will cause a
malfunction. (Only the smaller amount in each
column will print.) On the Product Cycle the
amount in the Product Accumulator may be
transferred to a crossfooter and/or register; either
added, subtracted or non-added as programmed
in the Control Unit. The product may also be
introduced into the" D" sec tion (Operand Storage
Unit) as a Multiplicand and/or Multiplier at the
same time.
B, Fig. 1-6
The Product Accumulator is located between
the "D" section and the components unit and
serves as a storage unit in which to accumulate
partial products. This electro -mechanical unit
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
5
Fig. 1-6
For Form 3747
I
6
Sec. I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
--------------------------~---
COMPONENTS UNIT
C, Fig. 1-6
This electro-mechanical section performs all
of the actual multiplication. It produces two
components for each multiplier digit which are
referred to as the right and left hand components.
These components are channeled into the Product
Accumulator where they accumulate into a grand
total or product. The columns of the Product
Accumulator which receive these components are
selected by the Components Unit which is in turn
directed by the Program Unit.
METHOD OF MUL TIPLICA TION
Multiplication as accomplished by the F2000
Computer utilizes what is referred to as a Right
and Left Hand Component method. To begin
with, the basic multiplication tables are broken
into right hand components and left hand components of each possible multiplying combination.
For example, in the case of 9 X 9, the product
is 81. The figure 1 to the right is the right hand
component of 9 X 9. The figure 8 to the left
is the left hand component of 9 X 9. It will be
noted that in all the multiplication tables, (of
1 through 9) the largest products have only two
numbers in them. (The largest product being
81; the result of 9 X 9).
Taking an example from the multiplication
table of 7, 3 X 7 = 21; the right hand component
of 3 X7 is I, the left hand component of 3 X 7
is 2. In the case where we have smaller figures
such as 3 X 3, the left hand component would
be O. For a compound example, 3 X 64109, the
right hand component would be 82307 and the
left hand component would be 11002.
Following is an example of a simple multiplication performed manually:
42345
X3
127035
This could be written as follows:
42345
X3
1 5
1 2
0 9
0 6
1 2
1 2 7 0 3 5
In the preceding example the Left and Right
components are:
Left hand components
Right hand components
5
2
o
9
o
6
2
This problem could be written another way:
42345
X3
26925 . Right Hand Component
1 0 Q 11
Left Hand Component
127035
The Computer performs this problem in a
similar manner as follows:
42345
3
26925
Entered in Multiplicand Storage (MC)
Entered in Multiplier Storage (MP)
On the first mulitplication cycle the
right hand components are added in the
Product Accumulator
10011 On the second multiplication cycle the
left hand components are added in the
Product Accumulator
127035 On the Sensimatic Cycle following the
answer is cleared from the Product
Accumulator & transferred as programmed in the Sensimatic Control Unit.
Sec. I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Multiplication tables are contained in 18
"function" tables, one for the right hand components of each number 1 through 9 and one for the
left hand components of each number 1 through 9.
These function tables are electrical circuits
printed on two disks - - one for all right hand
components and the other for all left hand components.
In the multiplication process, a figure
read from the Multiplier Storage Unit (part of
"D" section) turns the two disks to the function
tables for that figure. Electrical impulses are
sent through the tables (first the right and then
the left hand) to the Multiplicand Storage Unit
(part of "D" sec tion). Figures stored there permit the transferring, through switch connections, of these electrical right and left hand
components to the Product Accumulator.
A digit of the multiplier thus finds the
right hand components of the entire multiplicand
in one multiplying cycle and the left hand components in the next multiplying cycle. Each
digit of the multiplier, in turn, finds first the
right hand components and then the left hand
components of the multiplicand. The left hand
components are "stepped over" one column to the
left of the right hand components in adding in
the Product Accumulator. The multiplication
starts with the first significant digit on the right
and proceeds from right to left,
7
Two cycles are required for each digit of
value in the Multiplier. Each digit requires. 4
of a second (or 400 milli -seconds) except zero,
which requires no Significant time. This multiplying time is not affected by the number of
digits in the Multiplicand. To obtain maximum
speed, the Multiplier should contain the factor
with the least number of digits other than zeros.
To round off the answer ana clear the unwanted fractional amounts requires an additional
.4 of a second. A Sensimatic cycle is needed to
complete the operation and requires. 55 seconds.
The multiplication of a seven digit number by a
three digit number containing one zero would require approximately 1. 75 seconds including round
off, clear, transfer and print.
EXAMPLE
PROBLEM
62 53 754 - In Multiplicand
x709 - In Multiplier
OPERATION
TIME
Multiplication (2 digits x .4)
Round off & clear
Transfer & Print
Total Time
.8 Sec.
.4 Sec.
.55 Sec.
1.75 Sec.
.00
SPEED OF MUL TIPLICA TION
Multiplication is automatic and is controlled through pins used in lanes of the Control
Unit. A digit of the multiplier, other than zero,
requires two product accumulator cycles. On the
first cycle the right hand components are routed
electro-mechanically through the components
unit to the Product Accumulator and, on the
second cycle, the left hand components. The
cycling of the multiplying mechanism is controlled independently of, and not concurrently
with, the usual Sensimatic cycle. The product
accumulator cycles at the rate of 300 revolutions
per minute. This speed determines the basic
multiplying speed.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
qS
SEQUENCE OF MUL TIPLICA TION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The Multiplicand (or Multiplier) is introduced into the Operands Storage Unit.
The Multiplier (or Multiplicand) is introduced into the Operands Storage Unit.
Decimal Shift occurs as programmed.
The product is accumulated in the Product
Accumulator.
Round-off and clear occurs as programmed.
The Product Accumulator is cleared on the
first machine cycle following the multiplication (M) routine and in the same
carriage position.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
8
STOP POSITIONS REQUIRED FOR MUL TIPLICATION
Normally, three carriage positions and
machine cycles are required to complete a
multiplication problem.
THREE-POSITION MUL TIPLICA TION
Where both factors of a multiplication
are variable, three stops are normally used.
POSITION
1
5.(00)
2
DECIMAL SHIFT
The Decimal Shift provides a means of
selecting the proper group of Product Accumulator
columns in which the right and left hand components are to be accumulated. This selecting
must be accomplished before any amounts enter
the Product Accumulator in order for the decimal
point in the Product to fall between the proper
printing columns of the Basic Sensimatic.
Four decimal shifts are possible.
3
5(.00)
8 Decimal place
25(.00)
7 Decimal place
PM
MP
MC
M
5 Decimal place
In position I, the first factor is introduced
into the Multiplier (MP) Section of the
Operand Storage Unit.
In position 2, the Multiplicand (MC) is
introduced into the Operand Storage Unit
and multiplication (PM) is indexed.
In position 3, multiplication (M) takes
place.
If one factor is constant and one factor
is variable, one position may be eliminated.
Loading
1
10(.00)
7(.00)
MP
Me
2 Decimal place
Shift 8
20
1
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x •
Shift 7
20
1
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x o·
TWO POSITION MUL TIPLICA TION
POSITION
Sec. I
Shift 5
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2
70(.00)
1
20
0 0
o.
Shift 2
20
1
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
0 0000
o.
PM
M
In the loading position, the constant
factor 10( .00) is introduced into the
Multiplier (MP) section of the Operand
Storage Unit.
In position I, the variable factor is introduced into the Multiplicand (MC) section of the Operand Storage Unit.
In position 2, multiplication (M) takes
place.
·"X" indicates'possible active columns
in Product Accumulator.
The rule of decimal shift is:
THE SUM OF DECIMAL PLACES IN THE OPERANDS, MINUS THE DECIMAL PLACES REQUIRED
IN THE PRODUCT, EQUALS THE DECIMAL
SHIFT TO BE PROGRAMMED.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. I
Example:
$20.50 x 4.15 computed to dollars and
cents
2 Decimal places
+2 Decimal places
-2 Decimal places
2 Decimal Shift
9
duct accumulator as programmed in the Sensimatic Control Unit.
"Clear" is accomplished by eliminating the
digit in the column receiving the round-off pulse
and all columns to the right of it.
Example 1: round-off and clear, column "O"(RCO).
$20. 53 x 4.15 computed to dollars and cents.
Decimal shift of 2 would be programmed.
Since 2, 5,7, and 8 are the only shifts
available, if the answer when using the rule is
not 2, 5, 7 or 8, the number of decimal places
in the multiplier and/or multiplicand must be
increased or decreased to arrive at one of the
available shifts.
$20. 53(MC)
x4.15 (MP)
85. 1995 (Partial Product)
~ (Round-off)
85. 2045000000 (Partial Product)
Example:
85. 20xxxxxxxx (Clear)
$50.25 x .0125 computed to dollars and
cents.
2 Decimal places
+4 Decimal places
-2 Decimal places
4 Decimal Shift
Since there is no decimal shift of 4, a zero
is added to .0125 making it .01250.
$50.25 x .01250 computed to dollars and
cents.
2 Decimal places
+5 Decimal places
-2 Decimal places
5 Decimal Shift
85. 20 (Printed Product)
Example 2: round-off and clear column "2"(RC2)
$ . 00109 x 2,000.00 computed to dollars,
$ .00109 (Me)
x2, 000.00 (MP)
2.1800000000 (Partial Product)
•5
(Round -off)
2. 6800000000 (Partial Product)
2. xxxxxxxxxx (clear)
A decimal shift of 5 would be programmed
and the answer would be printed proper! y pointed
.
off.
ROUND-OFF AND CLEAR
When performing multiplication involving
decimals it is usually desirable to "round-off" the
answer toa unit of significant value and drop the
digits of no significant value. This is called
round -off and clear.
"Round-off" is accomplished by automatically adding 5 in column 0,1,2 or 3 in the proPrinted in U.S. America 12-1-62
$2. 00 (Printed Product)
Where the product is not carried to the nearest whole unit, no round-off is required. However, pins are still required in the program unit
to obtain a clear of the unwanted fractional
amounts. (NRC, with column designation)
In some applications it is necessary to retain the fractional amounts in the first eight
columns of the Product Accumulator and add
them to the next multiplication. This may be
accomplished also by programming and is called pro-rating (PR).
For Form 3747
I
10
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. I
~------------------
KEYBOARD
T
DECIMAL INDICATOR LAMPS
"C" AND "M" KEYS
These lamps are floating decimal points.
When an amount is to be indexed on the keyboard a Decimal Indicator Lamp will inform the
operator in which columns the amount should be
entered. Whole numbers will normally be indexed to the left of an illuminated lamp, and
cents and other fractions to the right. A row of
Decimal Indicator Lamp Windows are provided
below the "I" keys. The nine indicators are
located between columns, starting between
columns "0" and "I" and ending between columns "8" and "9". Only three of the lamps may
be programmed for illumination . The standard
. positions for the three lamps are located between
columns 2/3, 5/6 and 8/9.
The "C" and "M" keys are located in the
12th keyboard column, in positions 11 and 12.
They are normally used on applications where
it is desired to change a programmed Unit Price
multiplication to a Price Per Hundred (C) or a
Price Per Thousand (M).
One Decimal Indicator Lamp will be illuminated when the carriage is stationary except when
the Sensimatic Control Lever is moved to the
rearward position for normalizing the carriage. If
no pin is active in lane 64 or 65 the lamp on the
right will be illuminated. If an electrical pin is
active in lane 64 the center lamp will be illuminated. An active pin in lane 65 will illuminate
the lamp on the left side of the keyboard.
The "C" key always shifts the product seven
(7) places - regardless of the programmed shift.
The "M" key always shifts the product eight (8)
places - regardless of the programmed shift. To
have the Unit Price multiplications correctly
pointed off - whenever the "C" or "M" keys
might be used - a Decimal Shift of 5 (S5) must
be programmed.
The "C" or "M" key must be depressed in
the position prior to multiplication. A "Repeat
Keyboard" must be programmed in this position
to hold either key (" e" or "M") into the multiplication position.
In addition to shifting the product the "e"
or "M" key will cause a "e" or "M" to be printed in column 12.
Sec. I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
11
DELTA CLEAR
NEGATIVE MUL TIPLICA TION LAMP
The Delta Clear (or 20 place clear) operation
is used to clear the product accumulator of incorrect or fractional amounts following a power failure or after pro-rating. The operation can be indexed manually by depression of the Delta Key
(marked '~"). located in keyboard position 08,
with the carriage control disabling lever rearward.
It can also be programmed into the control unit
(lane 66) for automatic clearing after pro-rating.
This lamp located below the "NEG X" key
will glow red when a negative multiplication
has been called for by carriage control or by
manual indexing of the "NEG X" key. It will
remain illuminated until the entire multiplication
cycle has been completed or the condition is
cancelled by use of the Sensimatic Control Lever
or the Non -Multiply Key with a machine cycle.
NON-MULTIPLY KEY
Indexing of a Delta Clear operation causes the
multiplier section to cycle and clear itself and the
sensimatic to cycle, at the same time, to print
the clear symbol (. OO~ only. Any amount thus
cleared cannot be added to or subtracted from
the mechanical accumulating sections.
DepresslOn ot the Delta Key wHn the carriage control disabling lever forward, operates
the machine the same as Bar 2 and the product
accumulator will not be cleared.
POWER ON KEY
This key, marked "ON", is located in position 01. It turns on the power to the computer.
It must be held down momentarily when starting
machine. If not held down for a sufficient length
of time the key will restore. An electrical power
failure of sufficient length to give an erroneous
answer, will shut off the machine and this key
will restore.
POWER OFF KEY
This key, marked "OFF", is located in position D2. It turns off the power to the computt:r.
This key, marked NON X, is located in
position 6. When depressed, disables basic Sensimatic functions of Repeat of Keyboard, Repeat
and MBR. Does not operate the machine. Its
two functions are:
1. Disable Multiplication Routine
The Non-Multiply Key is used in the
Pre-multiply position when it is desired
to disable the multiplication routine.
It disables the Pre-multiply function.
When used it permits normal listing or
posting instead of multiplication in the
next operating position.
2. Disable Negative MultiplyIf a Negative Multiply is set up, the
Non-Multiply Key and a machine
cycle in any carriage position (not
programmed for multiplication) will
cancel it. If a Negative Multiply is
set up and the Non-multiply Key is
used in the next Pre-multiply position,
both the Pre-multiply and the Nega ti ve Multiply functions will be disabled.
CARRIAGE CONTROL DISABLING LEVER
NEGA TIVE MUL TIPL Y
This key, marked "NEG X", is located in
position D4-5. When depressed, provides a manual control of multiplication so that the next
product may be automatically subtracted from
the crossfooter and printed in red. This does not
alter the carriage controlled functions of register
"B" or "C". The "NEG X" key will not cycle
the machine.
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
In addition to its basic functions the
Carriage Control Lever is used to normalize
certain Computer functions as follows:
A.
Delta Clear
Before using the "~. key the Carriage
Control Lever must be positioned rearward. After using the ':6" key, it is
again positioned in its forward position.
C¥o! Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
12
B.
C.
D.
Motor Bar Used in Error
If a motor bar is used in a pre -multipl y
position which moves the carriage to a
position that is not programmed for
multiplication, or disable pre -multiply, the machine is inoperable. The
Carriage Control Lever must be used
to normalize the locks set up by the
pre -multipl y.
Negative Multiply
After the use of either the carriage controlled or the manual negative multiply, the negative multiply function
may be disabled by the Carriage Control Lever. This must be accomplished
prior to multiplication. The lever
need be positioned rearward only momentarily.
Decimal Indicator Lamps
The decimal indicator lamps may only
be illuminated when the Carriage Control Lever is in the forward position.
MACHINE INTERLOCKS
To eliminate the pOSSibility of operational
errors during a multiplication routine the following machine interlocks are active for protection.
For example, if in a Multiply (M) position, with
a preceding Pre-multiply (PM) control and a Repeat, the machine will always multiply first.
After multiplication the machine will then cycle.
COLUMN SELECTOR KEYS
After the start of the multiplication routine,
the Column Selector Keys are locked against depression. For example, in a Multiplication (M)
position, with a preceding Pre-multiply (PM)
control and a Repeat, the Column Selector Keys
are both locked immediately before the start of
the multiplication routine. After the product
cycle, the Column Selector Keys are free and
may be used.
CARRIAGE CONTROL DISABLING LEVER
After the start of the multiplication routine,
this lever is locked in its forward position until
the product cycle is completed.
KEYBOARD INTERLOCKS
A.
MACHINE BLOCK
B.
This interlock prevents a machine cycle
until the multiplication routine is completed.
Sec. I
The three upper keys in the keyboard
column "D", marked ''1:).'', "NON X"
and "NEG X", are interlocked to prevent depression of two or more of these
keys simultaneously.
The "A", "B" and "c" total and subtotal keys and the ''f).'' key are interlocked to prevent sinultaneous depression.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. I
13
TYPICAL BILLING OPERA TION
INVOICE
Burroughs
CD
No.
DEMONSTIltATING P'OlltM
e.'37!5
UII 1'5-
• Ace Manufacturlng Co.
SOLD
SHIP
:S579 Any St.
TO
:-=.~
NIC.
DactllPT10N
Line 1
Line 2
ITEM
ITEM
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
mICE DlCREASE 2:C liE!'
GRATIS CARTCIIS I'RElG!ll' CIt\RGI ~
REI"IlIID ON mEVlOUS FRElGHI'
. 88_
TO
Anywhere, U. S. A.
QUANTITY
."I~
12.710
10.1o'IC
1S
1102S
1.03M
1000
3000
.-
191.10
MULT.
0-=>0
162.I0I0+
1109.20.-
020
6.23+
6.65+
).09-
311.610-
CHARGES
- -
--
321.103-
--
~I-..
........
~
- -
Fig. 1-7
Schedule 4
First Line of Billing - Showing - 150/0 Discount
on the Gross Amount Shipped
List on the keyboard the price of the item, $12.74.
(Note: The decimal indicator lamp indicates
where to list the amounts on the keyboard, dollars
to the left and cents to the right of the light.)
Depression of motor bar 2 will cause the machine
to operate, print the amount, store it in the multiplicand (Me) storage unit and tab to position 8.
List on the keyboard the quantity shipped, 15.
The decimal indicator lamp is now lit between
keyboard columns 5/6. The amount will be listed
to the left of the light, (whole numbers to the
Printed in U. S. America
... -...
8S0
12-1-62
left and fractional amounts to the right of the
light). Depression of motor bar 1 will cause
the machine to operate, print the amount, store
it in the multiplier (MP) storage unit and tab to
position 9.
Here the machine will multiply, operate and
print the gross amount, store it in the multiplicand
(MC) storage unit and tab to position 10.
Note: To take a 150/0 discount on this line of billing, subtract 150/0 from 1000/0. The 850/0 will be
the multiplying factor. By multiply the gross
amount times the factor, .85, the net amount is
obtained.
For Form 3747
I
14
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
List on the keyboard the multiplying factor, .85.
(Note the decimal light between columns 5/6.
Since this is a fractional amount, it will be listed
to the right of the light.) Depression of motor
bar 2 will cause the machine to operate, print the
multiplying factor, store it in the multiplier (MP)
storage unit and tab to position 11.
Stop 11
The machine will multiply (M), print the net
amount, add it to the CF "A" and return to posidon 7 for the second line of billing.
Second Line of Billing Showing Price Per 100 with
No Discount
List on the keyboard the price of the item, $10.47
(Note decimal light). Depression of motor bar 2
will cause the machine to operate and print the
amount, store it in the multiplicand (MC) storage
unit and tab to position 8.
Sec. I
Repeat of motor bar 2 will operate the machine,
mbtotal CF .. A", print the amount, store it in the
multiplicand (MC) storage unit, space and return
to position 10.
Third Line of Billing - a 20/0 Price Increase on
the Net Bill
List on the keyboard the multiplying factor of .02
(Note decimal light). Depression of motor bar 2
will cause the machine to operate, print the factor, store it in the multiplier (MP) storage unit and
tab to position 11.
Here the machine will multiply (M), print the
amount, add it to CF "A", and return to position
7.
Fourth Line of Billing - the use of the Non-Multiply Key
List on the keyboard the quantity shipped, 1,425
(Note decimal light between columns 5/6). Because the price listed in position 7 was price per
100, the "C" key in column 12 will now be depressed. This will instruct the machine to multiply
by the price per 100 rather than the per unit price
which is scheduled for this position. Depression
of motor bar 4 will cause the machine to operate,
print the quantity, store it in the multiplier (MP)
storage unit, and skip to position 11.
Stop 11
Here the machine will multiply, print the net
amount, add it to CF "A", and skip to position
13.
Motor bar 2 will operate the machine and return
to pOSition 12.
This line of billing shows a gratis shipment of
I, 000 empty cartons to the customer, but billing
him for the freight cost. No price will be listed
in this case. Depression of motor bar 2 will operate the machine and tab the carriage to position
8.
List on the keyboard the quantity shipped, 1000
(Note decimal light). This being a gratis shipment with no multiplication needed, the nonmultiply key in column "D" is depressed. Depression of motor bar 2 will cause the machine
to operate, print the amount, store it in the .
multiplier (MP) storage unit and skip to position
11.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. I
"D" will instruct the machine to subtract the results of the multiplication from CF "A" in the
next position. Depression of motor bar 4 will
cause the machine to operate, print the amount,
store it in the multiplier (MP) storage unit and
skip to position 11.
List on the keyboard the freight charge of $6.65.
Depression of motor bar 2 will operate the machine. add the amount to CF "A". and return the
carriage to posItion 7.
Fifth Line of Billing - Price Per 1. 000 with a
Refund to the Customer For Overpayment of
Freight Charges
Here the machine will multiply, operate and
print in red, subtract the amount from CF "A"
and skip to position 13.
List on the keyboard the price of the item, $1. 03
(Note decimal light). Depression of motor bar 2
will cause the machine to operate and print the
amount, store it in the multiplicand (MC) storage
unit and tab to position 8.
Motor bar 1 will operate the machine and return
to position 12.
Repeat of motor bar 1 will operate the machine,
subtotal CF "A", print the amount, store it in
the multiplicand (MC) storage unit and return to
position 5.
List on the keyboard the quantity shipped, 3, 000
(Note decimal light). This is a case of posting a
refund to the customer of $1. 03 per 1. 000 pounds
on a previous freight charge. To do this. the "M"
key in column 12 is depressed. This will instruct
the machine to multiply by the price per I, 000
rather than the unit price which is scheduled for
this position.
Depression of the negative multiply key in column
~--
\'
)
1~
---
Here the machine will operate, total CF "A",
non print the amount, open the carriage and skip
to position 7 ready to begin another bill.
.
-~-----.
.....
.....
.....
"
Jtf1fu1L _~~~~ ~ ~ T
I _J'~~, nlli-~~~~a1
Qh.
.117.
11m
In,
.lb
15
.....
•• Iot
1'11.10
list
/J...7'1
IS
10.'17 C
IUS
,.03 M.
30"0
,lltt
,,3..'1"
19-'1.3.01-
02.0
6·#S
.3.0
9
,212.
,l2b
. Bfro
"f-
,
3/1. "".
I~
I
I
\-.
nlot
I
I
I
-~
-{
0
~
f-------.
S
bPM
as P
t_.
NA
Nil
.f'
D5''''
OpEN
lb
In
..
f---
AiA
VA
},'A
Jilt
-A.1t
},'It
1
/fIL
.0
Ds
(~Mi'
11m
"
"'P 1''''
,MeR P.R-
lpT KV6f)
----
.....
"
,
VA
DSI/.
1>1(.
IIIi' "'"
/(/,T
/tI8R
.....
I<'/il
;;L
'3
.s
MSS
DSR
DS/{
SpACf£
""
-*
Mil I
""'I
3
,..,~
II1PI<
SPACE
n ...
. _....
}.'111
Ad/.
S
i?,/'!
/lIAR.
s'P~c,;,
". ,
~-
---
(
nl
---------~
Fig:.~
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
Mil
Nil
AA
AlA
,ilHS
1It/t/
A.
1-8
For Form 3747
I
16
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
PROGRAMMING INFORMA TION
.*
LANE
NO.
1-25
26-30
31
32
33
34
35-40
41
42
43
44
45-60
:, ,,61
'. ? 62
'/« 63
64&65
Ii ,64
Jo 65
S! 66
PIN
NO.
LAYOUT
SYMBOL
3
$
2
2
MC
MP
7
5
3
1
0
7
5
PM
NPM
NM
SPM
RC
NRC
PR
0
0
7
1
5
2
3
:3
0
7
5
3
88
87
85
82
X
X
X
CFNC
DPM
M
.2
.5
.8
0
X
X
X
~
DESCRIPTION
Basic Series F
For Typewriter Use
Unassigned
Non -add, non -extend,
non-clear of Col. 1&2
Multiplicand
Multiplier
Unassigned
Pre -multiply
Negative Pre-multiply
Negative Multiply
Selective Pre-multiply
Round -off and Clear
No Round-Off, Clear
No Round-Off, No
Clear
Loca.tion of RC or
NRC, Column Q,
Location of RC or
NRC, Column 1
Location of RC or
NRC, Column 2
Location of RC or
NRC, Column 3
Decimal Shift 8 places
Decimal Shift 7 places
Decimal Shift 5 places
Decimal Shift 2 places
Unassigned
Non-Clear Lock
Disable Pre-Multiply
Multiply
Dec. Light Col. 2/3
Dec. Light Col. 5/6
Dec. Light Col. 8/9
Clear Product Accum.
Machines with rear insertion panels do not
use lanes 61-66 but use instead lanes 46-51ThereforeJsubtract 15 from each lane 61-66 in
the previous material tq find the corresponding
lane in the rear insertion panel machines.
Sec. I
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section II
•
LOGICAL DESCRIPTION
Printed in U.S.America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
2
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section II
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LOGICAL DESCRIPTION
Page No.
Basic Process of Multiplication ••
Basic Timing of the Pulse Route
The Pulse Route ••••••
Round-Off and Clear • • • • • • •
Multiplication Control Logic
'.
Setring Up the Preliminary Conditions ••
The First Right Hand Stroke • • •
The First Left Hand Stroke
The Second Right Hand Stroke. •
The Second Left Hand Stroke
The Third Right Hand Stroke
The Third Left Hand Stroke
Disable Pre-Multiply (Lane 62) ••
C and M Keys • • • • . • • • • • •
Negative Multiply and Negative Pre-Multiply
Decimal Lights • • • • • • •
Non-Multiply Key • . • • • •
Cross footer Non-Clear Lock
Clear Product Accumulator ••
Tab Delay Relay (K245) ••
Power Supply • • • • • • • •
Block Diagram - Control Logic
3
4
5
8
9
"
. ..
12
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
16
17
17
17
18
18
19
21
3
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
BASIC PROCESS OF MULTIPLICA TION
PICK UP
MUL TIPLICAN[
(MC)
F
C,(C..L[:
-
PICK UP
MUL TIPLIER
(MP)
PROGRAM
MULTIPLY
CONTROLS
,-:: C
-
START
MULT.
_
(PRE-SHIFT)
MULTIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
-
RIGHT HAND
STROKE
1ST DIGIT
-
RIGHT HAND
STROKE
2ND DIGIT
I
LEFT HAND
STROKE
1ST DIGIT
MULTIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
I
The F2000 Computer "multiplies" by adding
right and left hand components. A right and a
left hand component is added for each digit of the
multiplier. Each digit of the multiplier requires
two cycles of the multiplier drive which results in
two cycles of the product accumulator and one
cycle of the components unit and timing cam
assembly. The right hand components of the
first digit are added to the product accumulator
during the first half cycle of the components unit.
This is a "right hand stroke." The left hand components of the first digit are added during the last
half cycle of the components unit. This is a
"left hand stroke." This process is repeated until
the right and left hand components of the last
multiplier digit have been accumulated. An
additional right and left hand stroke are required
to complete multiplication. Round-off and clear
occurs, as programmed, during this time.
Components added to the product accumulator during the first right hand stroke create
what is referred to as the first "partial product. "
Components added during subsequent strokes (left
or right) produce a series of "partial products"
until the last left hand component produces the
"final product". Right and left hand components
are the result of routing pulses from the pulse
generator to the product accumulator through the
components unit and the multiplicand section of
the operand storage unit. The routing is predetermined by programming and by amounts
indexed into the operand storage unit.
MULTIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
I
LEFT HAND
STROKE
2ND DIGIT
~
MUL TIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
J
MULTIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
~
RIGHT HAND
STROKE
ROUND ,-OFF
I
LEFT HAND
STROKE
CLEAR
MUL TIPLIER
DRIVE
TRIP
I
MESHING
CONTROL
PICKS
MANUAL OR
I
PRODUCT
TRANSFER
PROGRA~I~IED
J..1ACHINE
TRIP
I
Fig. II-I
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
4
LEFT HAND
Sec, II
LEFT HAND
SHIFTER
FUNCTION TABLE
PLATEN
"-
PULSE
PRODUCT
GENERATOR
ACCUMULATOR
RIGHT HAND
FUNCTION TABLE
RIGHT HAND
I
SHIFTER
I
I
I
I
I
MULTIPLIER
STORAGE
f-
-
J
I
I
I
I
MULTIPLICAND
STORAGE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
----
I
1
CARRIAGE
CO NTROllED
Fig. 1I-2
Pulses from the pulse generator are applied
to the components unit during each cycle of the
multiplier drive, The components unit function
table disks, the positioning of which is determined
by the multiplier digit being used, routes the
proper pulse to the proper buss line of the multiplicand section of the operand storage unit,
Amounts previously stored there have completed
circuits from these buss lines to the shifter disks
of the components unit, The shifter disks connect
the twelve outputs of the multiplicand storage
section to their proper columns in the product
accumulator. In some style machines there are
only eleven columns in the operand storage unit.
BASIC TIMING OF THE PULSE ROUTE
At the start of multiplication, when multiplier drive trip solenoid L230 is energized, the
drive cycles once, the product accumulator
cycles once, the components unit camshaft cycles
180 0 and the timing cam switch assembly cycles
180°. The pulse route circuits are completed at
14 0 of the components unit cycles. S209 supplies
the basic nine pulse to the pulse generator beginning at 15 0 of the components unit cycle. The
pulse generator cam and the product accumulator
pinion shaft begin their forward rotation to accumulate the right hand components at approximately
Sec.
n
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
30 0 of the components unit cycle. As the multiplier drive trip solenoid is again energized, the
drive cycles once, the product accumulator
cycles once, the components unit camshaft
cycles 180 0 (to home) and the timing cam switch
assembly cycles 180 0 (to home). The pulse route
circuits are again completed at 1940 of the component cycle. S209 supplies the basic nine pulse
to the pulse generator beginning at 195 0 of the
components unit cycle. The pulse generator cam
and product accumulator pinion shaft begin their
forward rotation to accumulate the left hand components at approximately 210 0 of the components
unit cycle. Interlock circuits are provided to
ensure that the right or left hand disks (function
table and shifter) are fully positioned prior to
tripping the multiplier drive for a right or left
hand stroke respectively.
5
The pulse route originates with timing cam
switch 5209. This switch, when transferred,
applies B+ to the pulse generator. The resulting
pulses are routed through function table disks,
multiplicand storage section and shifter disks to
the product accumulator pinion solenoids. Energizing these solenoids at the proper time during
the product accumulator cycle allows a partial
rotation of the pinion corresponding to the length
of the pulse applied to the solenoid.
The Dulse generator consists of eight sets of
circuit-breaking contacts which receive B+ trom
timing cam switch S209 (Gate pulse generator).
The length of pulses one through eight is determined by opening these eight sets of contacts.
Timing cam switch S209 determines the length
of the nine pulse.
THE PULSE ROUTE
Note: The following pulse route description con';'
siders. 03 as the multiplier, 1,234,567.89
as the multiplicand and a shift of 2.
5209
15"- 110" 30'
5·-290· 30'
~~I~E 1~-
~I
-I
~2
-2
GEN.
.J--Lr-3
~
CB+
5266
PULSE GEN.
~
-5
-6
-7
-8
~4
...r---u-- 5
~6
FUNCTION
TABLE
DISKS
t--
MULTIPLICAND
STORAGE SECTION
SHIFTER
DISKS
-
PRODUCT
ACCUMULATOR
~7
~8
J
L9
Fig. II-3
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
en
o
CD
~
::s
F2000 COMPUTER MULTIPLYING PROCESS
MENTAL.OR MANUAL PROCESS
MULTIPLIER
H
H
ACCUMULATOIl CAPACITY
POSSIBLE DECIMAL POINT LOCATIONS
t
MULTIPLICAND·
MUL TI PUER :
..
175 785.06 -.~----<
.08038 ..
140628048 :
5273551 8
14fl6280480
t
t
,------t-APPROPRIATE
PROGRAMMED
MULTIPLICAND,
MULTIPUER
1-++-t-t-'-t'-t-=-Il7I.::+:::t:+::-i
J
[g
~I1-L..L....!-L...L-L--l......J.7-!~:.J..?~~-"-'---'--'--l
ANSWER:
LEFT HAND COMPONENT
OF
8 X 17578506
RIGHT HAND COMPONENT
OF
3 X 17578506
HAND COMPONENT OF
3 X 17578506
RIGHT HAND COMPONENT OF
8 X ·17578506
HAND COMPONENT OF
8 X 17578506
.
ROUND
OFF(~' ~)
CLEARING
TOTAL IN
OF UNWANTED
MULT. ACCUM.
PRINTED OR TRANSFERRED
SENSIMATIC ACCUMULATORS
PROGRAMMED
LOCATION OF
DECIMAL POINT
IN ANSWER.
Fig. 1
EXTENDED INTO OPERANO
STORAGE
FROM KEYBOARD OR ACCUM
8 X 17578506
LEFT
111411 /310.10\01. ANSWER AS
(S S")
RIGHT HAND COMPONENT OF
LEFT
t
DECIMAL SHIFT
IN ADVANCE
DIGITS
TO
• AMOUNT IN ACCUMULATOR
AFTER ADDITION OF PRECEDING
PARTIAL
PRODUCT.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
6
c--'Le::E:...:FT-.:Hc::A"'ND:...:...:FU::.::NC:.:.TI::::ON"-"-TA:.:::BL:=E_---, ::
=
~i!
LEFT HAND COMPONENT OF 3
'-----'-l_ _ _..-LLLl..l...l.----1
;;
§i
II
MULTiPlICARD
>--t
PULSE
GENERATOR
SHIFTER
DISKS
STORAGE
,
SECTION
r-
--
w~ tJ:l.
Sec. II
PRODUCT
-
ACCUMULATOR
I
U
RIGHT HAND COMPONENT OF 3
Fig. ll-4
RIGHT HAND FUNCTION TABLE
The nine different length pulses thus generated enter the components unit platen. During the
first half cycle (180'1 of the components unit the
platen is moved rearward to sense the right hand
function ta~le and shifter disks simultaneously.
During the remaining half cycle the platen is
moved forward to sense the left hand function
table and shifter disks simultaneously. The pulses
from the pulse generator are connected to nine
sensing pins on the platen. As these pins contact
the right or left function table disk they are connected by the disks to nine output platen pins which
are wired to the nine buss lines of the multiplicand
storage section. The position (1 through 9) of the
function table disks, representing the multiplier
digit being used, determines which input pulse
will be applied to which output pin (buss line of
the multiplicand storage section).
Ir
f
~
Prior to multiplication an amount representing the multiplicand must be indexed into the
operand storage unit. Indexing of this amount
positions the wiping gear contacts of the operand
storage unit (multiplicand section) to connect the
output line of each column to the buss line representing the digit indexed into that column. In this
manner pulses applied to the nine buss lines of the
multiplicand section of the operand storage unit
are routed to the twelve output lines of the multiplicand section which in turn are wired to twelve
pins on the components unit platen. As the platen
senses the right or left hand disks, the shifter disk
connects these twelve pins to twelve columns of
the product accumulator as a group. For example
if the output of column one of the multiplicand is
routed to column 7 of the product accumulator,
the output of column two would be routed to pro-
LEFT HAND PULSES
RIGHT HAND PULSES
BUSS LINE
MULTIPLICAND STORAGE
2(7)
8
2 ill
PULSE
GENERATOR
f--
FUNCTION
TABLE
DISKS
I
1
9
2 (4)
7
(8)
6
I (II)
II
I (2)
4
(9)
3
(6)
2
(3)
I
0
~2
II
10
~
8
7 ~
I
I
II
4
3
I
2
2
2
2
(3) (6) (9) (2) (II) (8) (I) (4) (7)
Fig. 11-5
SHIFTER DISKS
I
LEFT HAND COMPONENTS
RIGHT HAND COMPONENTS
i---
PRODUCT
ACCUMULATOR
6
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section II
Speed of Multiplication
The cycling of the electro mechanical multiplying mechanism is controlled independently of, and not concurrently with, the usual machine cycle. The Product Accumulator cycles at the rate of 300 revolutions per minute. This speed, because of
the time sharing of other multiplying operations, determines the basic multiplying
speed.
. Two cycles are required for each figure of value in the multiplier; one for the
-right hand component and one for the left. Each digit requires four tenths of a
second, except zero which requires no significant time. This multiplying time is
not affected by the number digits of the multiplic~nd. To obtain maximum speed the
multiplier should contain the factor with the least number of digits other than zerose
Round-off and clear requires an additional four tenths of a second. A machine
cycle is needed for the product cycle and requires about one half second. The multiplication of a ten-digit number by a five-digit number containing one zero would
require approximately 2.55 seconds including round-off, clear, transfer and print
as follows:
Multiplication (4 digits x 04)
Round-off and Clear
Transfer and Print
1.6 seconds
.4 seconds
~ seconds
2.55 seconds
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
7
duct accumulator, column 8, etc., with the
output of column 12 being routed to product
accumulator column 18. The position number of
the right hand shifter indicates the product
accumulator column to which the output of column one of the multiplicand is routed. For
example with the right hand shifter in position 7,
the output of column one of the multiplicand section will be routed to product accumulator
column 7 when the platen senses the right hand
disks. The left hand shifter is wired one column
to the left of the right hand shifter; therefore, in
left hand shifter position 7 the output of column
one of the multiplicand storage would be routed
to column 8 of the product accumulator as the
platen senses the left hand disks.
.,.
PULSE GENERATOR
z
L. H. SHIFTER
::>
f!?
Z
.,.
.
...
..
'"is
0
u
POS.7
I
FUNCTION TABLE
DISKS
0
z
:0::
:0::
if
MULTIPLICAND
STORAGE
SECTION
g
0:
~
,.
..J
::>
::>
(J
~
...
i
,
•••
••
•to•
,."
1
,"
f2
"
,
'"
IS
II
IT
.
It
It
IIII
pos.!'lllj
111111
R. H. SHIFTER
Fig. II-6
Printed in U. S. America 12 -1-62
For Form 3747
8
Burroughs - 5eriEls F2000 Instruction" Book
ROUND-OFF AND CLEAR
The final product. produced by the accumulation· of the right and left hand components of
all the digits of the multiplier. can be roundedoff and/or cleared to the nearest penny. dime.
dtiUar or ten dollars through programming. There
are three round-off and clear options (lane 42) and
four column location options (lane 43). For simplicity. round-off and clear keyboard column 1
(RC1) and no round-off and clear keyboard column
2 (NRC2). will be considered.
With RC1 programmed. round-off is accomplishe4, by routing the fi ve pulse from the pulse
generator to the product accumulator pinion solenoid in column 9 during the last right hand
stroke. The nine pulses from the pulse generator
are applied to the platen as on other strokes;
however. with the right hand shifter in position 21
these normal circuits are not completed to the
product accumulator. The five pulse is connected to two platen pins. one of which is located on
the function table side and the other on the shifter
disk side. This latter pin is connected through the
right hand shifter (in position 21) and another
platen pin to pad D of 5261 (lane 42). Pad D of
5261 is connected by its wiper to the A pad. The
A pad of 5261 is wired to the E pad of 5262 (lane
43). With RC1 programmed the wiper of 5262
" completes the round-off pulse route to pad C
which is wired to product accumulator column 9.
The "clear" function is accomplished by
pulsing the product accumulator total bail solenoid and applying nine pulses to those Product
Accumulator columns that are to be cleared (the
rounded-off column and all those to the right of
it). With the left hand shifter in position 21 and
the platen sensing the left hand disks, pad F of
5261 is connected to product accumulator columns 1 through 7 and back to pads D and C of
5261. The nine pulse from 5209-NO is wired to
pad E of 5261.
With RCI programmed, th.e wiper of 5261
will connect pads E-and F completing the clear
pulse route to product accumulator columns 1
through 7. Pad D of 5261 will supply the nine
pulse to pad A, which is wired to pad Eof 5262.
The wiper of5262, positioned for RCI will route
the nine pulse to pad C and column 9 of the product accumulator. Pad C of 5261 is wired to pad
D of 5263. The wiper for 5263, positioned with
52~2 from lane 43, completes the pulse route to
Sec. II
pad C of 5263 which is wired to column 8 of the
product accumulator. In this manner columns 1
through 9 receive the clear pulse.
With NRC2 programmed, the wipers of 5261
would be positioned to bridge the E and F pads,
and the A and C pads. The round-off pulse which
is applied to the D pad of 5261 would therefore be
lost and no round-off would occur dming the last
right hand stroke. During tbe last Ie ft hand stroke
the nine pulse would be routed to the D and C
pads of 5261 and to the first seven columns of the
product accumulator as previously described. The
nine pulse to pad Dof 5261 would produce no result. The nine pulse to pad C of 5261 which is
wired to pad D of 5263, is routed by the wiper of
5261 to pad A of 5261. Pad A of 5261 is wired to
pad E of 5262. With NRC2 programmed, the
wiper of 5263 connects pads C and B to pad D,
routing the nine pulse to columns 8 and 9 of the
product accumulator. The wiper of 5262 would
be positioned to connect pads Band E, thereby
.rout!-ng the nine pulse to column 10 of the product
accumulator. In this manner columns 1 through
10 receive the clear pulse. If no round-off. no
clear is programmed (Prorate) the five pulse would
be lost on pad D of 5261 and the nine pulse would
be lost on the E pad of 5261, due to the position
of the wipers for 5261.
L H. SHIFTER
POS. 21
I
'f III"~
II
P.A. COLUMNS
PULSE
GEN.
9
10
"
I'
.
POS.21
R. H. SHIFTER
• PULSE
028'
SEl.ECTOR
LANE ••
R 0 CLEAR
S263
CLEAR PO$
SELECTOR
LANE 43
0262
R 0 POS.
SELECTOR
LANE 43
Fig. II-7
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
MULTIPLICATION CONTROL LOGIC
Setting Up the Preliminary Conditions
In order to execute a multiplication it is
first necessary to extend both a multiplier and
multiplicand in the operand storage unit. This
is accomplished by operating the Sensimatic in a
carriage position containing a No.2 control pin
in lane 34 to extend the multiplier or in lane 33
to extend the multiplicand. The operand may be
listed on the keyboard or extracted from an accumulator by totaling or subtotaling it.
CB+
_1---..,
5
2K24....
9
positioned through the No.7 or No.5 pin to bridge
pads E and C. Voltage is supplied from pad C to
K201-29 and 30 to pick K201 (Multiply) and set
up the pre-multiply condition. Ground is furnished
through S233 (Non-Multiply Key), with the nonmultiply key normal, in parallel with Sensimatic
timing cam switch 5225 (Gate Manual Disable
Pre -Multiply).
Contacts K201-21 and 22 are designed to
make before K201-29 and 30 break. This provides a hold circuit for K201 through contacts
K201-21 and 22, resistor R223, S280 (Digit 5elector disk) in parallel with 5207, and S216 (Lane
62) after S221 opens at 121 0 • Opening of K20123 and 24 prevents picking of L222 (Machine Trip
Solenoid) in order to delay tripping of the 5ensimatic until after completion of the multiplication routine.
~---~-~-~~~3
C202
lut
400WV DC
~~:~~lT
LANE .47
TAB
DELAY
o
Pre-Shift
I
2
5216
___
-+___...J
3
4
In order to start the actual multiplication
routine, an electrical control pin must be placed
in lane 63 (Multiply) of the stop position in which
the multiplication is to occur.
5
6
PULSE MULT
NEG MULT
RELAYS
7
8
9
10
5207
290'-306
HOLD MULT.
RELAY
II
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5260
LANE 41
R223
6800
2W
19
20
21
0
5280
DIGIT SELECTOR
29
5233
NON-MULT
KEY
21
5225
40--130·
GATE MAN
DISABLE PRE-MULT
Fig. II-8
In th.e carriage position just prior to that in
which the multiplication is to occur, a pre-multi.;.
ply condition must be programmed by means of a
No. 7 or a No. 5 pin in lane 41. At 49 0 of the
Sensimatic cycle, S221 closes to supply voltage
to pad E of S260 (Lane 41), whose wiper has been
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
With the initial conditions having been set
up in the previous stop, K245 begins to pick as
the carriage reaches the multiplication stop and
5257 (Full Power) is normalized. CB+ is applied
to K245 through CR246. The ground circuit is
through K201-2 and 3, S223 (Gate Multiply
Routine) and S257.
CB+ is supplied through K201-24 and 25
to the common of 5217 which has been closed
by the pin in lane 63. This supplies CB+ to wiper
7 of S279 and through the circuit on 5279 to
wiper 8 to pick L223 (Directional Key Block).
which receives its ground through K245-4 and 5,
S223 and 5257. Picking of L223 permits S284
(Directional Key Interlock) to close to pick K202
(Start) through K202-6 and 7. K202-1 and 2
are designed to close before K202-6 and 7 open.
This provides a CB+ hold circuit for K202 through
K201-24 and 25, S217, 5205 (Start Relay Hold)
and K202-1 and 2. The ground circuit for K202
is the same as the ground circuit for L223.
With K202 picked,
cSt- is supplied from 5217
For Form 3747
I
10
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
through K202-28 and 29 and 5240 (C or M key,
which will be discussed later) to pick L225 (Decimal Shift) to release the decimal shift tappet
(Lane 44). By limiting the movement of the decimal shift tappet, the control pin in lane 44 determines the position of the wipers of 5264 and 5265.
Since K245-4 and 5 are in the ground circuit of
L223, it can be seen that the delay-pick charateristic of K245 causes a delay in picking K202
and ultimately delays the release of the decimal
shift tappet until the tappet and its control pin
are properly aligned.
S279
0
0
I
021
<>---0--020
I
0
I
0--0--02
0---&-0 I
0
~
I
8
CB+
S284
S217
MULTPIN
LANE 48
DIRECT
KEY
INTLK
CR229
Release of the decimal shift tappet causes
release of the decimal shift timer slide in the
auxiliary sensing unit to permit 5243 (Decimal
Shift Enable) to transfer. The timer slide is
required to delay pre-shift until after the shift
tappet has settled down if it bounces after it
limits on the control pin.
As soon as 5243 transfers, L226 (Right Hand
Shifter clutch) is energized to move the right hand
shifter disk, and L227 (Right Hand Function Table
clutch) is permitted to be energized to allow the
right hand function table disk to seek the position
corresponding to the value of the first multiplier
digit if the disk is not already there because of a
previous multiplication. The multiplier is "read"
from right to left.
CB+ to position the right hand shifter disk
is supplied through S243 to pad E of 8264. The
wiper of 8264, previously positioned as the shift
tappet limited on the control pin, connects pad
E with pad A, B, C or D depending on whether
there is a No.3, No.5, No. 7 or no pin at all
in lane 44 to cause a decimal shift of 2, 5, 7 or
8 places, respectivel y. This shift is necessary
to ensure that the product is generated in the
proper product accumulator columns to correspond with the desired decimal point loeation in the product.
8264-A, B, C and D are connected to
wiping contacts on the right hand shifter
pOSition selector disk (S277). One of the two
pads of each DZ switch of the. multiplier storage unit is also connected to a wiping contact
as is L226 (Right Hand 8hifter clutch) through
resistor 2B3. The other DZ switch pads are
connected in common to L226, also through
resistor 283.
As VOltage is applied to the selected decimal shift pad of 8264, the corresponding wiper
gates the voltage to the right hand shifter clutch
through the printed circuit configuration of 8277
to cause the right hand shifter disk (the same
disk as S277) to move one, two, four or seven
positions for an 8, 7, 5, or 2 shift, respectively.
S287
~.------.
SENSI GATE MUL:
DRIVE
TRIP
Sec. II
ROUTINE
35--352-
-"
Fig. II-9
When the disk has moved the required
number of steps for the programmed decimal
shift, the wiping contacts connected to the DZ
switches "read" the DZ switches from right to
Sec. II
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
left. If there are any zeros to the right of the
first multiplier digit, the corresponding DZ
switches will be closed. The right hand shifter
clutch is held through these switches until an
open DZ switch (indicating a significant digit)
is sensed. The disk is now in position to gate the
first right hand components to the proper product
accumulator columns.
The zero pads of all multiplier storage unit
columns are connected in series, whereas each
digit pad ("1" through "9") of each column is connected in common to the same digit pads of the
other columns. These digit commons, or busses,
are connected to wiping contacts on S276 (Function Table Position Selector). Two other wipers
on S276 are connected to L227 (Right Hand Function Table clutch solenoid) through S239 in parallel with hold resistor 2H3.
As previously mentioned, as soon as S243
closes the right hand function table clutch is
energized if it is necessary to move the right
hand function table disk to a new position. Voltage is applied through 8243 and K202-25 and 26
to me common pad of column one of the multiplier storage unit, through any zero switches closed
due to zeros to the right of the least Significant
digit in the multiplier, to the digit bus corresponding to first significant multiplier digit. L227
maybe energized through the selected wiper on
8276 and the circuit configuration of 8276 to
cause the right hand function table disk (the same
disk as 8276) to turn to the first digit position. If
the disk already is in the propeT position because
of a previous multiplication, the circuit configuration of 8276 does not permit L227 to be energized.
As soon as 8279 (pinned to the same shaft as
the right hand shifter disk) begins to turn, CB+ is
supplied from wiper 7 through a disk circuit to
wiper 6, and wipers 1 and 2 are bridged by another
circuit of the disk. From wiper 6, voltage is supplied through K202-22 and 23, K201-27 and 28,
S279-1 and 2 and 8203 and S251 is parallel with resistor 2V3 to energize L226 (Left Hand 8hifter
clutch solenoid) to move the left hand shifter disk.
When the left hand shifter disk has reached the
same relative position as the right hand shifter
disk, the circuit configuration of 8279 causes a
loss of continuity between Wipers 1 and 2, and
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
11
the left hand shifter clutch disengages.
With S279 out of home position, wiper
8 becomes isolated and L223 (Directional Key
Block) drops.
The left hand function table disk follows
the right hand function table disk in a similar
manner. As the right hand function table disk
begins to turn, disk 8278 (Function Table Follow-Up), which is pinned to the same shaft;
completes a circuit between S278-1 and 2. Voltage is applied through K201-24 and 25, K202-4
and 5, 8278-1 and 2, 8204, and 8250 in parallel
with resistor 2N3 to energize L229 (Left Hand Function Table clutch solenOid). The left hand disk
follows the right until 5278-1 and 2 open to drop
the clutch,indicating that the disks are in the
same relative position.
Each of the four disk clutch assemblies contains three switches, generally referred to as interlock switches although they do not all perform
interlock functions in the strictest sense. As the
clutch engages and begins to turn its disk(or
disks), the switches transfer and remain transferred until the clutch disengages. Pick VOltage is
applied to each clutch solenoid through the contacts of one of these switches in parallel with a
resistor. As the clutch shaft begins to turn, the
switch opens to cause part of the voltage applied
to the solenoid to be dropped across the resistor.
This is done for two reasons. 5ince the disk circuits actually break current to drop out the clutch
solenoids, reducing the voltage on the solenoid
reduces burning of the printed circuits. Also,
the reduced VOltage permits a faster drop-out of
the solenoids, especially important for the right
hand shifter since, if it over-stepped, an entire
multiplier digit wruld be skipped.
When the right hand shifter and right hand
func'tion table disks have been pOSitioned, voltage is applied from 5279-6 through 8249 (a
right hand function table interlock switch), 5247
(a right hand shifter interlock switch), 5206 and
K201-5 and 6 to energize L230 (Multiplier Accumulator Clutch solenOid) and trip the multiplier
drive for the first right hand accumulator cycle.
This occurs even though the left hand disks are
still moving since during the first accumulator
For Forni 3747
I
12
Burroughs - Series
cycle only the right hand disks are sensed.
The First Right Hand Stroke
F~OOO
Sec. IT
Instruction Book
the right hand shifter disk, the right hand disk
must be prevented from maving until the left
hand disk has been positioned. This is accomplished through interlock switch 5244.
Attached to the product accumulator drive
unit is a set of timing cam switches (5201 through
5214). The switch camshaft makes one revolution
for every two revolutions of the product accumu1ator. The stated timing to follow will be in relation to rotation of this camshaft unless otherwise
speCified.
S279
~
I
I
0---0--<12
S217
At 100 of the first right hand accumulator
cycle 5205 (Start Relay Hold) opens to drop K202.
Also at 100 5206 (Enable Right Hand Interlock)
opens. With 5206 open the next voltage path to
the multiplier accumulator clutch solenoid must
be through 5244 (a left hand shifter interlock
switch) and 5245 (a left hand function table interlock switch). This ensures that both left hand
disks are positioned before the accumulator clutch
is tripped for a left hand cycle.
5209 is closed from 150 to 110 0 30' to apply
voltage to the pulse generator to energize the active pinion solenoids through the coding circuits of
the components unit.
021
~20
MULTPIN
LANE-4!- I
CB+ !Or (
.
7
k202
--
---=-24~
25
26
S201
121"-132"
S243
DEC SHIFT
PULSE
SHIFTER
INTLk
ENABLE
~
S235
At 900 , 5203 (Gate Left Hand 5hifter Clutch)
and 5204 (Gate Left Hand Function Table Clutch)
open and remain open until 3150 • This is to prevent repoSitioning the left hand disks until after
completion of the left hand platen stroke.
At 1210 , after platen sensing has been completed. 5201 (Pulse 5hifter.Interlock) closes to
pick K203 (5hifter Interlock). CSt. is supplied to
5201 from 5279-5. which receives voltage from
wiper 7 through a circuit of 5279. K203 is picked by 5201 through K203-25 and 26. K203-21
and 22 make before K203 -25 and 26 break. After
K203 -25 and 26 open, a hold circuit is provided
from 5243, through K202-24 and 25. 5235 (a
right hand shifter interlock switch) and K203-21
and 22.
If by this time the left hand shifter disk
has been positioned, voltage is applied from
5279-6 through 5244 (a left hand shifter interlock switch). K203 -23 and 24 and 5246(a right
hand shifter interlock switch) to energize the
right hand shifter clutch solenoid. 5ince the
left hand shifter follow circuit disk moves with
Fig. II-10
As the right hand shifter clutch engages and
starts. to move its disk, interlock switch 5235 opens
to drop K203. and 5277 wipers "read" the DZ ,
switches as during pre -shift. If there are zeros to
the left of the first multiplier digit, a hold circuit is provided for the right hand shifter clutch
through the DZ switches in the columns containing the zeros and through resistor 283. The first
open DZ switch to be "read" causes the clutch
to drop. If there is a digit immediately to the
left of the first multiplier digit. the disk will
move only one position, for which case CR204
is }X'ovided to prevent overstepping in case K203
is slow in dropping. If there are no more multiplier digits, the right hand shifter disk will move
Sec.
n
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
13
all the way to position 21. However, to provide
a more complete explanation of the multiply
routine, it will be assumed that there are two
m'ultiplier digits.
cuit to the clutch solenoid.
The digit selector disk, 5280, is on the
back of the left hand shifter disk and is positioned with it. After pre -shift, the digit selector is used to determine subsequent positions of
the right hand function table. A wiping contact
of 5280 connects to each column common, except column 1, of the multiplier storage unit.
Other wipers connect to 5265-A, B, C and D.
The wiper of 5265 is positioned by the decimal
shift tappet to connect pad E With pad A. B, C
or D, depending on the programmed decimal
shift. The configuration of 5280 is such that
with the left hand shifter disk in position, the
selected 2, 5, 7 or 8 shift wiper is connected
through the multiplier storage unit to the function table position selector (5276) wiper corresponding to value of the next multiplier digit.
5214 (Enable Left Hand Interlock) is closed
from 1550 to 1900 to energize L230 for the first
left hand cycle. The voltage path is from 5279-6
through 5244 (a left hand shifter interlock switch),
5245 (a left hand function table interlock SWitch),
5214 and K20l-5 and 6. The interlock switches
are necessary to ensure that the left hand shifter
and left hand function table disks have been positioned before the accumulator clutch is tripped
and the disks are sensed.
5202 (Gate Right Hand Function Table
Clutch) closes at 1210. Voltage is applied to
5202 from 5243 through K202-24 and 25, 5236
~a left hand shifter interlock switch) and 5237
(a left hand function table interlock SWitch).
5202 applies VOltage to 5265 to energize the
right hand function table clutch solenoid to
move the disk to its next position. 5236 is
necessary to ensure that the left hand shifter
disk has been positioned prior to picking the
right hand function table clutch since the digit
selector on the back of the left hand shifter
disk in conjunction with the multiplier storage
unit determines to which position the function
table diSk is to go. Also, since the right hand
function table and the left hand function table
follow-up disks are pinned to the same shaft,
5237 is required to ensure that the left hand
function table disk has been positioned prior to
moving the right hand function table disk.
5209 is closed from 1950 to 290 0 30' to energize the product accumulator solenoids which are
to receive the left hand components.
As the right hand function table disk begins
to tum, 5238 (a right hand function table interlock switch) closes to bypass 5202 and provide a
hold circuit for the right hand function table
clutch solenoid in case the disk must be moved so
great a distance that it is not fully positioned by
the time 5202 opens at 2700 • The clutch drops
out when, as before, the 5276 disk opens the cirPrinted in U.S. America 12-1-62
The carry pulse is supplied to the product
o
0
accumulator by 5208 from 138 to 170 •
The First Left Hand Stroke
If the right hand shifter and right hand function table disks have not been fully repOSitioned
by the time the left hand cycle begins, positioning
will be completed during the cycle.
0
o
5207 is open from 290 to 306 • However,
two Wipers on 5280 (Digit Selector) are bridged
by a circuit of 5280 to provide an alternate circuit to hold K201.
o
At 315, after platen sensing, S203 and
5204 close to permit the left hand shifter and
left hand function table disks to follow-up the
right hand disks. The shifter follow circuit is
from S279-6 through S249 (a right hand function
table interlock switch), K202 -21 and -22, K20127 and 28 and the follow circuit disk. The function table follow circuit is also from S279-6 but
through 5249, K202-3 and 4 and the follow circuit disk.
The carry pulse is supplied to the product
0
o
accumulator bV 5208 from 318 t~ 350
o
5206 closes at 335 to complete the CB+
circuit from S279-6 through S249 (a right hand
function table interlock SWitch), 5247 (a right
hand shifter interlock switch) and K201-5and 6
to pick the multiplier accumulator clutch solenoid for the second right hand cycle.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
14
Sec. II
S20S supplies th~ carry 1&ulse to the product
accumulator from 318 to 350 •
The Second Right Hand Stroke
At 10° 5206 opens, as during the first
right hand cycle, to ensure that the subsequent
pick circuit for L230 will be through the circuit containing left hand interlock switches.
The active product accumulator pinion
solenoids are energized while 5209 is closed
from 150 to 110° 30' during platen sensing.
5203 and 5204 open at 900 • While the
left hand shifter and left hand function table
disks are moving, 5203 and S204 are paralleled
by 5251 (a left hand shifter interlock switch) and
S250 (a left hand function table switch), respectively. If by 900 either left hand disk has not
been fully positioned, its clutch solenoid continues to be energized through 5251 or S250 until the follow-up disk opens the circuit to drop
the clutch.
From 1210 to 132°, S201 is closed to pick
K203 to reposition the right hand shifter disk as
:Juring the first right hand cycle. However, since
it is being assumed that there are no more multiplier digits, all of the remaining DZ switches are
assumed closed and the right hand shifter disk
moves all the way to position 21 where it stops as
disk 5277 drops the clutch solenoid.
°
When S202 closes at 121 , the right hand
function table disk will not move because of the
lack of an additional multiplier digit.
520S supplies the carry pulse from 13So to
170°.
The product accumulator clutch solenoid
is picked for the second left hand cycle when
5214 is closed between 155° and 1900 and both
left hand disks have been positioned.
5206 closes at 3350 so that L230 will be
picked for the next right hand cycle (round -off)
as soon as the right hand shifter disk has been
fully positioned in position 21.
The Third Right'Hand Stroke (Round-Oft)
L231 (Round -Off Release Solenoid) is connected to wiper (5277-Al) on disk 5277 (Right
Hand Shifter Position Selector). As the right
hand shifter disk and consequently S277 reach position 21, the active shift wiper is connected by
a disk circuit to the round -off wiper to energize
L231 which releases the round -off and clear control tappets in lanes 42 and 43.
At 100 5206 opens the right hand pick circuit for L230.
At 150 5209 closes so that a Qpulse will
be gated by the round-off circuit to the product
accumulator column selected through control
unit programming to receive the round -off pulse.
5212 (Pulse Total Bail) is closed from 450
to 720 30' to complete a circuit from wiper 5277Al through K201-S and 9 to pick L235 (Total Bail).
This indexes the product accumulator total bail,
which will be mechanically actuated during the
next cycle.
The pick circuits of the left hand shifter
and left hand function table clutch solenoids
o
are opened When 5203 and 5204 open at 90 •
The Second Left Hand Stroke
With disk S279 in position 21. CB+ is removed from wiper 5. This removes CB+ from
S201 so that when 5201 closes at 1210. K203 will
not pick and the right hand shifter diskwi11 not
move.
The active product accumulator solenoids
are energized by S209 from 1950 to 290° 30'.
5208 completes the carry circuit from 13So
to 1700 •
o
At 315 5203 and 5204 close. The left
hand shifter disk begins to follow the right to
pOSition 21 but the left hand function table disk
does not move since it is still in the same relative
position as the right.
5214 is closed from 15~ to 1900 to pick the
accumulator clutch solenoid with the left hand
shifter disk in position 21.
15
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
The Third Left Hand Stroke (Clear)
I
cuit of K20l as soon as the carriage has settled
down. The Sensimatic will then operate normally.
Accidental dropping of K20l by lane 62 pins as the
carriage moves between stops is prevented by K245
(Tab Delay), contacts 1 and 2.
Early in this cycle the total limit bail is
mechanically actuated. At 1950 S209 closes to
apply the clear (9) pulse to the product accumulator solenoids in the columns selected through
programming to be cleared.
C ANDM KEYS
S207 (Hold Multiply Relay) opens at 290 0
and K20l drops since the alternate hold circuit
which had been provided by disk S280 is open
with the disk in position 21.
The C or M key is used in a multiplication
stop to override the carriage controlled decimal
shifr. The C key provides a shift of 7 and the M
key a shift Qf 8.
K201-24 and 25 open to disable the S208
carry circuit.
These keys are most commonly used in a
billing operation in conjunction with a carriage
controlled shift of 5. Use of die C or M key converts a unit price to a price per hundred or price
per thousand, respectively.
K20l-23 and 24 close to home the right
hand shifter disk through wipers S279 -3 and 4
bridged by a circuit of S279 until the disk is in
home position.
At 3000 S213 closes to complete the CB+
circuit from K201-23 and 24 to piCk L233 (Mesh
Control) which lowers the transfer link. The product will be transferred as the Sensimatic cycles.
The left hand shifter disk homes through
its S279 follow circuit and K201-26 and 27 when
S203 closes at 3150 •
As K201-2 and 3 open and K201-1 and 2
close, S287 (Sensimatic Drive Trip) is inserted
in the K245 ground circuit. If a motor bar has
been depressed or a repeat of machine operation
has been set up, 5287 is transferred to complete
the ground circuit and K245 is held. CB+ is supplied from K201-23 and 24 through K245-6 and 7
and the crossfooter non -clear lock switch network
to energize L222 (Machine Trip) permitting the
Sensimatic drive to trip.
Depression of the M key transfers S240,
which opens the circuit to L225 (DeCimal Shift)
so that the shift tappet will not be released, S240,
transferred, also bypasses 5243 (Decimal Shift
Enable) in conjunction with K202-28 and 29.
Since the shift tappet does not release, the wipers
of S264 and S265 remain in their normal positions,
bridging common pads E and 8 shift pads D.
The multiplication circuits are basically the
same as during a normal multiplication. However,
during pre-shift, voltage is supplied to the right
hand shifter and right hand function table circuits
through K202-28 and 29. transferred 5240 and
normal S243 instead of through transferred S243.
After K202 drops during the first right hand cycle.
voltage is supplied to the right hand clutch circuits from S279-6 through CR227 and normal S243.
CR227 is necessary to isolate S279-6 from S279-7
with S279 home to prevent prematurely energizing
L230 (Multiplier Accumulator Clutch).
DISABLE PRE -MUL TIPL Y (LANE 62)
In some cases, for reasons of application, it
may be desired, after setting up a pre-multiply
condition, to vary the machine operation and select a carriage stop pOSition in which it is not desired to multiply. An electrical control pin placed
in lane 62 (5216) of this stop position will disable
the pre-multiply condition by opening the hold cirPrinted in U. S. America 12 -1-62
Depression of the C key transfers S241 and
S242 as well as S240. S24l and S242 transfer the
right hand clutch circuits from the 8 shift wipers
of S277 (Right Hand Shifter Position Selector) and
S280 (Digit Selector) to the 7 shift wipers.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
16
NEGA TlVE MULTIPLY AND NEGA TIVE
PRE -MULTIPLY
With a negative multiply condition set up,
the next product generated will subtract from
crossfooter A during product transfer and will be
printed in red.
CB+
PULSE MULT
NEG. MULT.
RELAYS
K204
S232 E
MAN. NEG.
MULT. KEY
S260
LANE 41
22
the non-multiply key depressed. Release ot negative multiply may also be accomplished by momentarily moving the carriage control disabling
lever to the rear.
Programmed negative multiply requires a
No. 3 pin in lane 41. Negative pre-multiply,
which is actually negative multiply and premultiply indexed simultaneously, requires a
No.5 pin.
As the 5ensimatic is cycled during a negative total or subtotal of crossfooter A, 5234
(C.F.A. Negative) closes as the pinions are crossshifted. A No. 3 or a No. 5 pin in lane 41 causes
the wiper of S260 (Lane 41) to be positioned to
bridge pads E, B and A, or pads E, C and B, respectively. Pad A is used only with the multiple
factor storage feature.
S231
RELEASE
NEG. MULT.
CONT.
21
Sec. II
S234
C.F.A. NEG.
o
At 49 5221 closes to supply CB+ to S260-E
and B and through S234 and K204-28 and 29 to
pick K204 (Negative Multiply). With a No. 5
pin active in lane 41, voltage is also supplied to
S260-C to pick K201 (Multiply) and set up a premultiply condition. Ground is supplied to both
K201 and K204 through S233 (Non-Multiply Key)
in parallel with S225 (Gate Manual Disable PreMultiply).
With the negative multiply key depressed,
S232 (Manual Negative Multiply Key) is closed
to bypass both S260 and S234 so that K204 may
be picked without special programming or crossfooter A controls.
9-..&.lo..4
...
S 2 25
40·-130·
GATE MAN.
DISABLE PRE-MULT.
Fig. ll-ll
Negative multiply may be indexed either
through control unit programming or by depression of the negative multiply key. A Sensimadc cycle is always required, and to set up a
carriage controlled negative multiply crossfooter
A must be in a negative condition and totaled or
subtotaled. With carriage controls active, negative multiply remains indexed until a product
transfer cycle or until a sensimatic cycle with
K204-21 and 22 are designed to make before
K204-28 and 29 break providing a K204 hold circuit through K204-21 and 22 and S23l (Release
Negative Multiply.
With K204 picked, DS204 is illuminated
through R227 and K204-26 and 27 to provide a
visual indication that a negative multiply condition has been set up.
As the transfer linkage is unlatched during
the clear cycle of the subsequent multiplication,
S256 (Gate C.F.A. Subtract) transfers. L232
(C.F.A. Subtract) is energized through S256 and
K204-26 and 27 to simulate control pins in lanes
7 (C. F. A. Subtract) and 12 (red ribbon). As the
product accumulator is meshed, the meshing
Sec. II
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
17
link opens 5231 to drop K204.
picked because of the open ground.
DECIMAL LIGHTS
S225 serves two purposes. It prevents
dropping K201 if the non-multiply key is depressed during a multiplication routine, which would
result in a wrong product, and it also prevents
dropping K201 or K204 if the key is accidentally
depressed at any time without cycling the Sensimatico
Decimal point indication lights on the keyboard are provided as standard construction between columns 2 and 3 (.2), 5 and 6 (.5) and 8
and 9 (.8). These are illuminated through control unit programming to indicate in which keyboard columns amounts should be indexed.
CROSSFOOTER NON -CLEAR LOCK
With a control pin in lane 64, the light
is between columns 5 and 6. A control pin in
lane 65 produces a light between columns 8 and
9 and lack of a pin in either lane results in a
light between columns 2 and 3.
CB+ is supplied to the decimal lights
through CR244 (isolates MB+ from CB+) and R224.
Ground is supplied through S223 (Gate Multiply
Routine). S2l8 (Lane 64) and, if programmed.
S2l9 (Lane 65).
With no pin in either lane 64 and 65, the
circuit to DS201 (.2) is completed through 5218
and S2l9 in series. A pin in lane 64 transfers
S2l8 to complete the circuit to DS203 (.5). With
a pin in lane 65 the circuit to 05202 is completed
through 5218 by transferred S2l9.
There is no decimal indication light with
the carriage controls inactive.
NON-MULTIPLY KEY
The non -multiply key is used to prevent
setting up a programmed pre-multiply or negative multiply condition by overriding the carriage controls. It also prevents setting up a repeat of machine operation, motor bar repeat or
carriage controlled repeat of keyboard.
The common ground circuit for K20l and
K204 is through normally closed S233 (Non-Multi~
ply Key) in parallel with S225 (Gate Manual Disable Pre-Multiply). With the non-multiply key
depressed, ground is removed from K20l and K204
while 5225 is open from 40 0 to 1300 of the 5ensimatic cycle. Since the pick circuit for the relays
is through S22l (Pulse Mult~ly and Negative Multiply Relays) from 490 to 121 , the relays cannot be
Printed in U.S America 12-1-62
The crossfooter non-clear lock control permits blocking of the Sensimatic drive trip through
control unit programming if crossfooter A is not
clear. Depression of motor bar No. I disables the
lock.
To release the Sensimatic drive with carriage controls active L222 (Machine Trip) must
be energized through K20l-23 and 24, K245-6
and 7 and a switch network consisting of three
parallel circuits. Normally closed S220 (Crossfooter Non -Clear Lock - Lane 61) is in parallel
with normally open 5255 (Release Non -Clear
Lock). Both of these switches are in parallel
with a switch network consisting of 5254 (C. F • A .
5ign) in series with S252 (+clear) and S253 (clear) which are in parallel.
With a control pin in lane 61 to open S220
and motor bar No.1 normal, L222 can be energized only through S254 and either 5252 or 5253.
Either S252 or 5253, but not both, can be closed
at one time. With crossfooter A clear in a plus
condition S252 is closed and with crossfooter A
clear in a minus condition S253 is closed. Both
switches are open when the crossfooter is not
clear. 5254 is normal with crossfooter A in a
plus condition and transferred with the crossfooter minus. This forces the machine trip circuit to be through S252 with the crossfooter plus
and through S253 with the crossfooter minus. S254
is necessary because when one set of crossfooter
pinions is clear the other contains all nines.
Depression of motor bar No. I closes
S255 which bypasses the parallel switch network to pick L222.
With carriage controls inactive, the
For Form 3747
I
18
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
non -clear lock control is disabled since MB+
is then supplied directly to L222 through CR223.
Sec. II
Resistor R225 across S215 is provided to hold
L234 if the carriage moves out of the stop position before the clapper reset bail has been latched.
CLEAR PRODUCT ACCUMULA TOR
TAB DELA Y RELA Y (K245)
After prorating or after a power failure during multiplication, it may be necessary to clear
the product accumulator. This may be done,
either by depression of the 6 key with carriage
controls disabled or through control unit programming.
Depression of the A key trips the Sensimatic drive and closes S248 (Manual Clear),
supplying MB+ to S222 (Pulse Multiplier Accumulator Clutch). S222 is closed from fP to
1550 of the Sensimatic cycle to energize L224
(Keyboard Stop), L236 (Symbol Slide Stop) and
L237 (Register Designation Stop) and to pick
L230 (Multiplier Accumulator Clutch) through
5210 (Home Multiplier Accumulator) and K201-4
and 5.
S212 (Pulse Total Bail) is closed from 45 0 to
72 0 30' of multiplier timing switch camshaft
rotation to energize L235 (Total Bail), which
partially indexes the product accumulator total
bail.
At 1600 5210 (Home Multiplier Accumulator)
closes to pick L230 through K20l-4 and 5 for a second product accumulator cycle.
Because of the complex manner in which
it is controlled and since it has several uses, K245
will be treated separately.
K245 is actually a triple purpose, delay pick
relay. Its main function, however. is to delay
the trip of the Sensimatic drive until the program
unit has settled down after the carriage has been
tabulated or returned more than two inches.
With the carriage in a non-multiplying stop
position, depression of a motor bar transfers 5287
(Drive Trip) to complete the ground circuit to
K245 through S257-NC (Full Power), 5223 (Gate.
Multiply Routine) and K201-1 and 2. CB+ is supplied through CR246 which isolates CB+ from MB+.
When K245 picks, K245-6 and 7 complete the CB+
circuit to L222 (Machine Trip) through K201-23
and 24 and 5220 (Lane 61) to release the Sensimatic drive.
K245
TAB
DELAY
CB+
K201
XI
...._ _ _ S223
~
Early in the second accumulator cycle the
total bail is latched in and at 1830 30' 5211
(Pulse Clapper Bail) closes to energize L234 to
latch the clapper reset bail in active position.
With the clappers held clear of the pinions, the
accumulator is cleared by rotating the pinions
until the total lobes limit on the total bail.
CR246
SENSI
DRIVE
TRIP
GATE MULT.
ROUTINE
35°-352°
Fig. 11-12
Carriage controlled clearing of the product
accumulator is accomplished in a similar manner.
with a control pin active in lane 66. The Sensimatic drive must be tripped through a programmed
repeat or depression of a motor bar. CB+ is supplied to 5222 through 5256 (Gate C.F.A subtract)
and 5215. (Lane 66). 5256 is in the circuit to ensure that the meshing link has been reset before
the accumulator clutch is tripped for a clear
operation.
When the carriage is moving, 5257 is
transferred to supply full power to the magnetic
carriage drive clutch and also to open the ground
circuit of K245. As the carriage reaches a nonmultiplying stop position, S257 normalizes and,
with a motor bar depressed or a repeat of machine operation set up, 1<;245 begins to pick. The
slow pick characteristic of K245 causes a delay
Sec. II
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
19
in closing K245 -6 and 7 which complete the CB+
circuit to L222. This ensures alignment of control pins and tappets before the Sensimatic drive
trips. At 350 of the Sensimatic cycle S223 transfers to drop K245.
diately drop again repeatedly until K245 did drop
to provide the K201 hold. This would cause ex cessive burning of the K201 pick contacts. CR245,
however, provides a hold path as long as S221 is
closed.
Since it is sometimes desired to select a
motor bar in a multiply position, to prevent loss
of speed multiplication will begin w~thout depression of a motor bar. In order to begin multi !.
plication, however, K245 must be picked. Therefore, since K201 already has been picked before
the carriage enters the multiply stop, K201-2 and
3 bypass 5287 in the K245 ground circuit.
The third purpose of K245 is to' dela y the
release of the decimal shift tappet until the carriage has settled in a stop pOSition. This is
covered in detail in the discussion of the preshift portion of the multiplication routine.
It is not necessary to delay the Sensimatic
drive trip through K245 when the carriage has
moved less than two inches since the carriage will
have been positioned before the Sensimatic camshaft,reaches its home position. A delay is prevented by 5223 in conjunction with 5287 (Drive
Trip). At 350 of the 5ensimatic cycle, 5223
transfers to drop K245 by opening its ground circuit. 5223 remains transferred until 3520 . However, at 3130 , 5287 resets and, since 5223 is still
transferred, the ground circuit of K245 is remade
to repick K245. If, by this time. the carriage has
completed its movement, there is virtually no delay of drive trip.
A second function of K245 is to provide an
alternate hold circuit for K201 to prevent accidental release of K201 by lane 62 pins as the carriage moves between stops. As previously explained, K245 is always normal when the carriage
is moving. Therefore. a set of its normally closed contacts is used to bypass 5216 (Lane 62) contacts with the carriage in motion.
In case it is desired to program a DPM
(Disable Pre-Multiply - Lane 62) and a PM
(Pre-Multiply - Lane 41) in the same carriage
position, 4iode CR245 between S260C and the
normally closed contact of 5216 (Lane 62) is
required to provide an alternate hold circuit
for K201. At 350 of the Sensimatic cycle, 5223
transfers to drop K245 which will provide the
K201 hold through normally closed contacts. At
490 , 5221 closes to provide the pulse to pick K201.
If K245 does not have time to drop before K201
picks, without CR245 K201 would pick and immePrinted in U.S. America 12-1-62
Arc suppression for K245 is provided by
CR250.
POWER 5UPPL Y
The DC power for the F2000 Computer is
provided by a full wave rectified power supply
mounted inside the rear gate of the machine
stand. An AC powered blower (B202, Fig. 11-13)
also mounted in the gate serves to cool the various electrical components.
The power transformer (T201) isolates the
DC electrical system from the power line and
through acenter-tapped secondary winding facilitates full wave rectification. Rectification
is provided by two silicon diode rectifiers (CR201
and CR202). A 5-ohm series resistor (R228) prevents damage to the rectifiers by reducing the
charging current drawn by the filter capacitor
(C201) as Jre AC power is turned on. A 750-ohm
bleeder resistor (R221) provides voltage regulation
and also discharges the filter capacitor when the
AC power is turned off.
5ince the current requirements of the F2000
are relatively high, a heavy duty AC relay (K205)
is used to control the main input. Depression of
the ON key closes S228 completing the AC circuit
to K205. The ON key is latched electromechanically through the ON key latch solenoid L221. If
the line voltage is interrupted for a period long
enough to cause incorrect multiplication (more
than 200 millisecond9.-L221 drops out to release
the ON key ag(;t,trutii' off the AC power. Zener
diode CR206~series With L221 always drops 50
volts when it is in a state of conduction so that
the voltage applied to L221 is 50 volts less than
the DC output of the power supply. This causes
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
20
....
.~-----
T20I
C"202
RZze
Sec. II
F202
o-=..:--\II·r--.....--T-'V'~--,r-V'--y--·u
A221
70.
lOw
~~--ES
I
I
I-
I
~
I.. H. S.
START
PailTiONING
L. H. S.
DISK
CLUTCH SOL.
L228
PICKS
(---
I
I
I
I
ENABLE R. H.
INTERLOCKS
S206
CLaiES
----
F. T. Pa>ITlON
SELECTOR
S276
OPENS
OPEN D-Z
SWITCH
---.
~
~ H. F. T.
CLUTCH SOl..
L227
DROPS
R. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L226
DROPS
~
INTERLOCK SW.
S249
CLa>E5
J
ULT. ACCUM.
CLUTCH SOL.
L230
PICKS
1----+
INTERLOCK SW.
5247
CLaiES
Fig. 11-17
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
24
Sec. II
ADD RIGHT HAND COMPONENTS
INITIAL CARRY POSITION
I
I
I
I
I
20
40
60
I
30
BO
100
I
40
I
I
10
20
BEGIN R.H.
STROKE 14°
15°
50
I
I
120
I
60
140
I
70
I
160
I
80
I
IBO
I
90
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.00
220
I
110
240
260
I
130
280
300
I
100
320
340
I
I
160
170
I
100
PLATEN SENSING
CURRENT TO PULSE GENERATOR
I
120
I
140
II
I
I
(
I
~--'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PULSE SHIFTER
INTERLOCK
S201
CLOSES
~
SHIFTER INTER.
RELAY K203
PICKS
l
r--
R. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L226
PICKS
J
S235
OPENS TO
DROP K203
~
F. T. FOLLOW UP
S278-1, -2
OPEN
L. H. F. T.
CLUTCH SOl..
L229
DROPS
I.. H. S.
I.. H. S.
FOLLOW UP
5279-1, -2
OPEN
CLUTCH SOL.
L228
DROPS
INTERLOCK SW.
S245
CLOSES
I
I
I
4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L. H. S.
FOLLOW UP
S279-1, -2
CLOSE
t
START
POSITIONING
R. H. S.
DISK
ENABLE I.. H.
INTERLOCK
S214
CLOSES
l
INTERLOCK SW.
S244
CLOSES
Fig. 11-18
MULT. ACCUM.
CLUTCH SOL.
L230
PICKS
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
25
ADD LEFT HAND COMPONENTS
INITIAL CARRY POSITION
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
40
lOo.
140
160
260
280
300
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
220
230
200
1
280
240
I
180
1
270
220
1
200
60
1
210
0Cl
I
120
1
240
I
20
290
300
31O
320
330
190
B~-¥~~EL. H 1940
1950
250
260
,
I
,
320
340
1 ----+--:!4()
350
PLATEN SENSING
CURRENT TO PULSE GENERATOR
I
I
GATEL. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
S203
CLOSES
,
L. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L228
PICKS
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
,
I
START
POSITIONING
L. H. S.
DISK
1
I
I
1
1
I
ENABLE R. H.
INTERLOCKS
S206
CLOSES
R. H. SHIFTER
S277
OPENS IN
POSITION 21
r---.
,
R. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L226 DROPS
IN POSITION 21
R. O. RELEASE
L231
PICKS
~
--.
INTERLOCK SW.
S247
CLOSES
PIN IN LANES
42 AND 43
POSITION
5261, 2. 3 FOR
R. O.AND CLEAR
!
MULL ACCUM.
CLUTCH SOL.
L230
PICKS
Fig. II-19
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
26
Sec. II
ADD ROUND OFF PULSE
INITIAL CARRY POSITION
I
I
20
40
60
I
I
I
10
20
JO
BEGIN R.O. 14°
STROKE
15°
80
1
40
I
I
I
I
I
120
140
160
200
220
240
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
60
70
80
90
100
110
:so
180
PLATEN SENSING
'5 PULSE FROM P.G. 74°
I
i
I
100
120
260
280
300
320
340
I
I
I
I
I
130
i40
150
160
170
115°
PULSE TOTAL
BAIL SWITCH
S212
CLOSES
TOTAL BAIL
SOLENOID
L235
PICKS
5280 HOLD
FOR K20I
OPENS IN
POSITION 21
ENABLE L. H.
rNTERLOCKS
5214
CLOSES
1, H. S.
FOLWW UP
5279-1, -2
OPEN rN
POSITION 21
1-_-.1
1, H. S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L228
DROPS
Fig. II -20
1--....
MULT. ACCUM.
SW·I-_ _~CLUTCH SOL.
L230
CLOSES
PICKS
INTE~~K
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. II
27
ACCUMULATE CLEAR PULSES
TOTAL BAIL IN ACTIVE POSITION
TOTAL LATCH BAIL ACTIVE
20
40
I
I
190
200
194 0
1950
60
100
80
140
120
I
I
I
I
I
210
220
230
240
250
160
I
260
180
200
I
I
270
280
240
I
380
260
I
310
280
300
I
I
320
330
320
1
340
340
I
350
PLATEN SENSING
S209 SUPPLIES 9 PULSE FOR CLEAR 2
I---------------------- J
I
I
j---
I
GA TE MESHING
CONTROL SOL.
S213
CLOSES
HOLD MULT.
RELAY SWITCH
S207
OPENS
I
I
K201-23, -24
CONTACTS
CLOSE
MULT. RELAY
K201
DROPS
J
R. H. S.
CLUTCH SOL,.
L226
PICKS
I
L. H. S.
FOLLOW UP
S279-I, -2
CLOSE
MESHING
I
CONTROL SOL.
L233
PICKS
l
MACH. TRIP
SOL. L222
PICKS IF
S287 IS
TRA NSFERRED
1
I
....
I
I
I
I
HOMING CIR.
S279-3, -4
OPEN
R. H. 5.
CLUTCH SOL.
L226
DROPS
I
I
1
1
I
GATE L. H. S,
CLUTCH SOL.
S203
CLOSES
T
L.H.S.
CLUTCH SOL.
L228
PICKS
K201-26-27
CONTACTS
CLOSE
~
L. H. S.
FOLLOW UP
S279-I, -2
OPEN
,
L. H. 5.
CLUTCH SOL.
L22B
DROPS
Fig. II -21
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
OUTLINE OF MULTIPLICATION ON F2000
Including Pick-Ups of Multiplier, Multiplicand,
Pre-Multiply and Multiply Routine
A.
Index and extend multiplier (MP)
1. Sensimaticcycle with 2 pin in lane 34.
B.
Index and extend multiplicand (MC)
1. Sensimatic cycle with 2 pin in lane 33.
c.
Pre-Multiply
1. Sensimatic cycle with 7 or 5 pin in lane 41 (this picks
and holds K201. and) thru pOints 24 and 25 of K 201,
machine block L'222 is picked to prevent next sensimatic
cycle till product is ready to transfer)
D.
Multiply Routine
1. Pick start relay (K 202); this requires 4 conditionst
(1) Sensimatic home (re: S 22.3)
(2) Carriage on a stop (re: S 226)
(3) An X pin in lane 48 (re: S 217)
(4) K 201 picked in next previous stop (res K 2012 and .3.)
Note: L 223 directional key block will also be picked
when K 202 picks.
2.
Note:
Pick L 225 which releases tappet in lane 44 to sense programmed Decimal Shift. (Sensing lever in lane 44 transfers
S 24.3 and moves wipers in S 264 and S 265 to position
designated by pin length)
If ItC" or"MJt key was used goi~ into mp.ltiply routine,~>"S
L 225 will not be picked becau~e of S 240 and -~'Yifll
a
not be transferred. Also, wipers in S 264 and S 265 will
not be positioned. This, in effect, will override programmed Decimal Shift and allow S 241 and S 242 po determine
whether an 8 Shift or 7 Shift is to be used.
3.
Position all discs in components unit, in preparation to
start pulse routing (all discs go regardless of interlocks,
re: K 202)
(1) R.H.S. to first position determined by S 264 and
_D-Z swi!-che~(S 279 is pinned to same shaft as
R.H.S. so it goes- to sam.e position.)
L.H.S. to first position determined byR.H.S.
through follow up circuit (S 280 digit :selector
is on back of L.H.S. disc so it goes to ~am.e
position.)
Noe6
Nota If right & left disks are not in the same position wipers
will be oo~~ected ~fo1mmv up)
#
1 &2
3.
0) R&H.F.To to first position determined by K 202 -
25 and 26 and value of rightmost digit in multiplier
storage (82'78 is pinned to same shaft as R.H.F.T.
so it moves with R.R .. F.T.) ..
(4) L~ReF~T. to first position determined by R.H.F.T.
through follow up circuit ( 5 .;:2.. 1 g) ,
40 First right hand platen stroke (via 8 206)
(1) Break start relay hold (via 8 205)
(2) Pulse route produces right hand components of
first MP digit times MC (15 0
-
noo
of 8 209).
(3) car~ signal anticipate~need for carries(138° 1700 /of 8 208).
(4) R.,H.,F.T .. finds new position as platen moves away
from it (120 0 - 270 0 of S 202 -- through digit
selector$ MP storage and R.R.F.T. position selector).
(5) R.. R.. S .. finds new position as platen moves away
from it (121° = 1320 of 8 201 -- through single
position shift fTom K 203 and subsequent shifting
via D-Zswitches);
(6) Note 2 Since K 202 has been dropped and S 203 and
S 204 opened at 90 0 - 315 0 , L~H.F.T. and L.R.S.
will not follow-up ~til after left platen stroke ..
5. First left hand platen stroke
(via S 214)
(1) Pulse route produces left hand components of first
MP dig:it times MC (195° - 290 0 of S 2(9)
(2) Carry signal. anti.cipates need for carries (3180 350 0 of S 208)
(3) Left hand function table and left hand shifter
follow~up to right hand discs positions via follO{up circuits S 278 and S 279 respectively at 315 0
(res S 20] and 8204). Note: Digit selector, .
S 280 move$ with LeR.5.
6.Repeat steps D~4 and D-5 for each signifi6ant digit in MP
storage with following eXceptionsl
.
(1) After K 202 was broken in first right platen
stroke it did not pick again so it, would not have
to be broken again.
(2) After last MPdigit~ ReH.S. will go to position 21
and fire L 231 (round off release) 1IVhich allows
lanes 42 and 43 to become active. B+ will also
be made available to 5 212 via K 201 - 9 and. 8.
(3) After last MP digit$ ReH.F.T. will not re-position.
70 Last right platen stroke (Round Off)
- 2 -
(1) 5 Pulse from pulse generator to column designated
(2)
(3)
(4)
by lanes 42 and 43.
Carry signal anticipates need for carryon round
off.
Total bail set up by L 235 at 45 0 via S 212.
Note: R.H.S. does not re-position as on other
right platen strokes since S 279 control circuits
have cut off S 201.
8.
Last left platen stroke (Clear after Round Off)
(1) S 209 sends 9 pulses to columns designated by
lanes 42 and 43.
(2) Total bail dropped in at beginning of stroke so
that pinions in the designated columns would limit
at cipher instead of just adding 9's.
Note: If no round off and .no clear was scheduled,
pinions would limit on clappers and stay where
they were, however, the last right and left strokes
of the platen would still take place.
9.
Transfer Product. During last Ieft platen stroke the operation of S 207 (which lost its jumper when S 280 reached
position 21) breaks hold circuit for K 201 at 290 0 causing
the following to happen:
;1,.70
(1) R.H.S. goes to position 0 (Home) via S~~3 and 4.
(2) L.H.S. follows R.H.S. to position 0 (Home) via
follow up circuit S 279-1 and 2.
(3) Lost B+ for carry signal and machine block (K 201 24 and 25 opened).
Note: Machine block could be held if crossfooter
non clear lock were called for and crosstooter was
not clear.
(4) Fire mesh control solenoid (L 233) via K 201 2 and 1 and S 213. The mesh control mechanism sets
up snatcher bail, transfers S 256 anticipating
negative multiply and makes transfer linkage move
.to a position where it will be active with sensima tic cyc Ie •
(5) Sensimatic drive tripped by motor bar or RPT from
previous stop causes sensimatic cycle which pulls
transfer linkage (via arm driven by main camshaft)
to drive total bail in and mesh accumulator pinions
with add racks. A helper rack turns pinion shaft
so that pinions move at same speed as add racks
until pinions limit on total bail; then studs of
add racks enter lock plates and transfer of product has bEqen effected.
(Note: directional key
block was released by a stud on the sensimatic
camshaft during the transfer cycle.)
- 3 -
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
I
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section III
•
MECHANISMS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
Printed in U.S.America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
2
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MECHANISMS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Page No.
On and Off Keys • • •
Delta Key • • • • • •
Symbol Stop Solenoid
Negative Multiply Key.
Non -Mul tipl y Key • • •
Motor Bar #1 Releases Non -Clear Lock
Carriage Control Lever to Transfer S230
C and M Keys • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Register Designation Blocking Solenoid
Machine Trip Interlock Solenoid
Machine Trip Switch . • • • • • •
Directional Key Block and Interlock Switch
,i~'ii~"DeCimal Indicator Lamps • • • • • • • • •
Magnetic Clutch and Full Power Switch
Full Power Interlock Switch
CF "A" Negative Switch S234
Negative Multiply Release Switch
CF "A" Subtract Switch
•••••
Indexing of CF "A" Subtract and Red Ribbon
In-Tab Switches •••
Motor Friction Clutch
GearBox .•••..~.•
Lane 32 - Prora ~;.~
Operand Storage Unit.
Printed Circuit Switch Assembl y •
Lanes 41, 42 and 43 • • • • • ••
Lane 44 and Decimal Shift Enable Switch
Electrical Lane Switches • • • • •
Computer Timing Cam Assembly
Sensimatic Timing Cam Assembly.
Pulse Generator
Drive Unit Assembly
Components Unit •••
The Product Accumulator
20 Place Clear
Keyboard Stops
Side Insertion Control Unit. •
Latch Plate Assembly •••
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
6
8
8
9
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
26
30
38
39
41
46
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
ON AND OFF KEYS
Depression of "On" key A, through keystem
Q, will swing lip I of bellcrank D away from the
plunger of switch G (S228) allowing its points to
transfer. With the "On" key depressed and solenoid M (L221) energized, the hook of clapper
latch P will latch keystem Q in a depressed position' allowing the points of switch G to remain
transferred.
Depression of "Off" key B, through Keystem
C, will swing lip J of bellcrank E away from the
plunger of switch K (S229) allowing its points to
transfer. This breaks the circuit to solenoid M
and allows the "On" key mechanism to restore to
normal.
3
K7-4-5 With the "On" key A depressed and clapper latch P held against its core, clapper
latch P should have at least full hold on keystem Q and should not exceed full hold plus
.010". Clapper latch P should drop freely
onto the step of keystem Q.
To Adjust, loosen screws N and position
bracket O.
Reason: To provide the correct hold for retaining the On key in its depressed position.
K7-4-6 With solenoid M de-energized, there
should be .005" to .010" passing clearance
between the projection of clapper P and lower portion of keys tern Q.
To Adjust, bend clapper retainer L as required.
Reason: To ensure pulling clapper P against
solenoid M.
B
"ti'
(DELTA) KEY
Depression of the .'[:::;.. key with the carriage
control lever in its rearward position trips the
sensimatic drive and releases switch E (S248).
As key lever A is depressed, lip D moves
away from the actuator of switch E (S248) allowing its points to transfer. Arm G of key lever A
rocks arm F through its stud tripping the sensirna tie drive,
A
N
M
Fig. III-I
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENrS
K7-4-3 With "On" and "Off" keys normal and
bellcranks D and E limiting against stud H,
there should be .025" to .030" clearance
between lips J and I and the bodies of switches
G and K.
To Adjust, weave lips J and I as required.
Reason: To ensure that the switch points are
transferred at normal without overdriving
the switch plunger.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
Fig. III-2
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
K7-4-3 With''/::;.' key normal and key lever
limiting on stud C, there should be .025" to
• 030" clearance between lip D and the body
of switch E.
To Adjust, weave lip D as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring switch point
at normal without overdriving actuator or
limiting on switch bod y.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
4
SYMBOL STOP SOLENOID
Located on the right side of the machine,
symbol stop solenoid L236 is used to prevent the
movement of the symbol slides when a 20 place
clear is taken, in order that the Delta sign (A)
only will print.
When solenoid L236 is energized and attracts
clapper G, bail C will be free to pivot when the
Sensimatic is operated. As cam I rotates, symbol
restoring arm A is pivoted, expanding spring D
and releasing bail C, which is pivoted upward by
spring H to block the symbol slides. As arm A
is restored to normal by spring D, bail C is reset
on clapper G by stud B.
Sec. III
PR13-2 With the machine normal, clapper G
should limit against the vertical surface of
the lower step on bail C.
To Adjust, bend clapper retainer F as required.
Reason: To ensure that the step of bail C
will have a full hold on clapper G.
PR13 -3 With the machine normal, there should
be .010" to .015" clearance between the
upper surface of clapper G and the lower
step of bail C.
To Adjust, tip the front of the solenoid
bracket up or down as required.
Reason: To ensure the restoring of clapper G
under the step of bail C.
PR13-4 During the early portion of the machine
cycle, when solenoid L236 is not energized,
the projections on the symbol indexing slides
should clear bail C and when solenoid L236
is energized, the projections on the symbol
indexing slides should have a full hold on
bail C.
To Adjust, recheck PR13-3.
Reason: To ensure blocking or indexing of
the symbol indexing slides.
NEGA TIVE MUL TIPL Y KEY
Fig. III-3
Depression of the negative multiply key provides a manual control of multiplication so that
the next product will be subtracted from the crossfooter and ribbon shift indexed.
Rocking of bellcrank N moves its lip away
from the actuator of switch M ($232) allowing
its points to transfer.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
PR13-l With the machine normal and the top of
clapper G tilted away from the machine, the
step of bail C should have at lease a full side
hold on the upper surface of clapper G.
To Adjust, loosen solenoid bracket mounting
nut and position as required.
Reason: To provide a limit for bail C during
a machine operation when the solenoid is
not energized.
K7-4-3 With negative multiply key normal and
bellcrank N limiting on stud L, there should
be .025" to .030" clearance between the lip
of N and the body of switch M.
To Adjust, weave the lip of N as required.
Reason: To ensure that the switch points are
transferred at normal without overdriving
the switch plunger.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
5
H
K
NON-MULTIPLY KEY
Depression of the non-multiplying key prevents indexing of pre-multiply functions and
disables repeat of machine operation, repeat of
keyboard and motor bar repeat.
Rocking of bellcrank 0 moves lip J away
from the actuator of switch K (S233) allowing
its points to transfer. As bellcrank 0 is rocked,
link I pivois bellcrank A, swinging stud B down
to block forward movement of arm D and to position trap latch H behind projection E on slide G,
preventing rearward movement of slide G.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
K7-4-1 With the non-multiplying key latched
down, latch H should have no less than full
hold on projection E of slide G but should
not bottom on slide G.
To Adjust, bend forward arm of bellcrank A
as required.
Reason: To prevent indexing repeat of
machine and keyboard operations.
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
I
G
Fig. 1II-4
K7-4-2 With the non-multiplying key latched
down, stud B should have no less than full
hold on the vertical surface of step on bail
D and stud B should have passing clearance,
not to exceed .030", with the vertical surface of the step on bail D.
To Adjust, weave the rear portion of bail D
as required.
Reason: To prevent indexing of motor bar
repeat.
K7 -4-3 With the non -multiply key normal and
bellcrank 0 limiting against stud L, there
should be . 025" to .030" clearance between
lip J and the body of switch K.
To Adjust, weave lip J as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring the switch at
normal without overdriving the switch
plunger.
v
For Form 3747
6
. Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
MOTOR BAR #1 RELEASES NON -CLEAR LOCK
CARRIAGE CONTROL LEVER TO TRANSFER S230
A crossfooter non -clear lock can be released
by transferring the points of S255 from the depression of motor bar #1.
The points of S255 are transferred by lip D
when motor bar #1 is depressed through bellcrank
F, link E and bail C.
CB+ and MB+ voltages lO the computer are
controlled by the position of the carriage control
lever.
When lever A is in a forward pOSition, the
points of S230 are transferred through lip B of
bail G and link H to supply CB+. When lever A
is in a rearward position of the points of S230 are
normal to supply MB+.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
Cll-2-1 With lever A in a forward position, the
actuator of S230 should be depressed to within • 025" to • 030" of switch body.
To Adjust, weave bail G as required.
Reason: To ensure positive transfer of the
points of S230.
C &M KEYS
The C & M keys are used by the operator to
change the programmed shift of the machine,
from a unit price multiplication to a price per
hundred by depression of the C key, or a price
per thousand from depression the M key.
On 5/S" tab machines depression of the C
key transfers the points of switches S241 and
S242 through bellcrank C. The lip on bellcrank
C pivots bellcrank B, transferring the points of
S240. Depression of the M key transfers the
points of S240 through bellcrank B.
Fig. III-5
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A21-1-1 With motor bar #1 normal, ther should
be clearance, not to exceed. 005", between
lip D and the plunger of S255.
To Adjust, weave bail C as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring switch S255
with motor bar #1 depressed.
Fig. III-6
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
K1-1 With the M key held depressed, there
should be .005" to .010" clearance between keylever B and the body of switch
5240.
To Adjust, weave keylever B at the end
which contacts keystem E.
Reason: To ensure closing switch 5240 without overdriving the plunger or limiting
keylever.
Kl-2 With the C key held depressed, there
should be .005" to .010" clearance between
keylevers Band C and the body of their respective switch.
To Adjust, weave keylever C at the end
which contacts keystem D.
Reason: To ensure closing switches 5240,
5241 and S242 without overdriving the
plunger or limiting keylever C.
7
With the mechanism normal, actuator bails
J and K limit on post H and hold the switch
plungers depressed.
Depression of the "c" key cams slide B
forward to rock both actuator bails J and K clear
of all three switch plungers. This permits the
normally closed switch contacts to close.
As the "M" key is depressed, slide F is
cammed forward to rock only actuator bail K.
This permits the contacts of only S240 to normalize.
I
G
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
K
Fig. III-7
On 1/10" tab machines the "c" and "M"
keys serve the same purpose as those on earlier
machines. The physical layout and mechanical
operation of the parts, however, are considerably
different.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
K1-1-1 With the "c" and "M" keys normal,
there should be .025" to .030" clearance
between the ears of the actuator bails and
the switch bodies.
To Adjust, weave the ears of the actuator
bails as required where contact is made with
the switch plungers.
Reason: To ensure transferring the switches
without overdri ving their plungers.
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
8
REGISTER DESIGNATION BLOCKING SOLENOID
The register designation blocking solenoid
located at the front of the machine to the left of
the decimal indicator lights, prevents printing
the register symbol when a 20 place clear is
taken.
When solenoid B is energized clapper D
pivots arm G in front of the stud in rack A blocking its movement.
Sec. III
Reason: To ensure sufficient blocking hold
on register designation rack A and to ensure
cla pper D limiting on the core of solenoid
B for maximum efficiency.
PR5 -2 -2 With clapper D held against its core and
register nine selected, manually cycle the
machine. The stud on the latch of rack A
should enter the cipher tooth space of the lock
plate centrally.
To Adjust, recheck step B of PR5-2-1.
Reason: To ensure free entry of the stud into
the cipher tooth space of the lock plate.
PR5-2-3 With clapper D limiting against clapper
retainer C, there should be .020" to .025"
air gap between the button on clapper D and
the core of solenoid B.
To Adjust, weave retainer C, as required.
Reason: To ensure that bail G clears rack A
with clapper D normal and for minimum
air gap.
MACHINE TRIP INTERLOCK SOLENOID
The machine trip interlock solenoid is located on the outside of the left auxiliary sideframe
and is used to block the Sensimatic drive trip.
The difference in the earlier 5/8" tab and the
present 1/10" tab machines is that solenoid L222
must be energized to permit drive trip on 1/10"
tab machines, whereas on 5/8" tab machines
energizing L222 prevented drive trip.
o
Fig. III-8
A
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
PR5-2-l Manually cycle the machine until register designation rack A reaches its maximum rearward travel (approx. 90 0 ). With
clapper D held against its core, bail G
should:
(a) align centrally with square stud of rack A.
(b) have at least 3/4 hold on the square stud
of rack A without binding on the vertical
surface of the step of bail G.
(c) have at least 3/4 hold on the square stud
of rack A without binding on the horizontal surface of the step of bail G.
To Adjust, (a) bend rear arm of bail G.
(b) starting with the high side at 12 o'clock
turn eccentric screw F as required.
(c) bend front projection E of bail G as reqUired.
Fig. III-9
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
When solenoid L222 is de -energized, spring
F urges clapper E against link G which rocks bail
C to position hook A over the ear of trip bail B
and thereby prevents drive trip. When solenoid
L222 is energized, clapper E through link G and
bail C raises hook A to allow drive trip bail B to
move forward and release the clutch dog release
arm.
9
With trip shaft A normal, spring F through
lever C holds the points of 5287 transferred. As
drive trip is set up, trip shaft A rocks lever C
away from the plunger of 5287, permitting the
switch to normalize and complete the ground
circuit of L222 through the N. C. contacts of
S287.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
P7-1-2 There should be .010" to .015" passing
clearance between hook A and the ear of
bail B (see insert 1) with clapper E held
against its core.
To Adjust, loosen solenoid bracket mounting
screws and position as required.
Reason: To prevent a false limit and to ensure release of trip bail B by hook A.
P7-2-1 There should be .010" to .015" clearance
between the straight portion of hook A and
the top edge of the ear of bail B (see insert
2) with clapper E normal.
To Adjust, weave retainer D.
Reason: To ensure sufficient hold of hook A
on the ear of bail B to prevent drive trip.
MACHINE TRIP SWITCH
In order to eliminate the necessity of keeping L222 energized for long periods of time,
machine trip switch S287 is wired into the ground
circuit of L222 (1/10" tab machines only). The
ground circuit to L222 is completed only when
drive trip is set up.
P19-1 With trip shaft A normal and lever C
limiting against stud D, there should be
.050" to .060" clearance between ear E
and the body of S287.
To Adjust, weave ear E as required.
Reason: To prevent energizing the machine
blocking solenoid (L222) with the machine
normal.
P19-2 With a control key partially depressed,
depress motor bar 2. The contact of S287
should not transfer.
To Adjust, bend ear B as required.
Reason: To prevent energizing L222 improperly.
P19-3 With trip shaft A in a tripped position,
there should be no less than. 020" clearance
between ear E and the plunger of S287.
To Adjust, recheck P19-2.
Reason: To permit energizing L222 with
drive trip set up.
Fig. III-10
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
10
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
DIRECTIONAL KEY BLOCK AND INTERLOCK
SWITCH
The directional key block prevents the depreSSion of the tab and return keys and disengagement of the carriage control lever during the
multiply routine prior to the product transfer
cycle. Switch R (S284) will prevent the start of
multiplication if the directional keys are partially
depressed by blocking slide L.
When solenoid K (L223) is energized, clapper
M moves slide L to the right where it is retained
by latch G in cutout E through tension of spring F.
Latch G releases switch R when it drops into cutout E. With slide L in its latched position, tab
and return keys are blocked from depression by
ears Hand D. Disengagement of carriage control
lever A is prevented by lip C blocking ear B. On
the next Sensimatic operation, part G will be
raised by roller P transferring switch R and allowing spring N to restore slide L and clapper M.
To Adjust. loosen screws I and position
bracket J as required.
Reason: To prevent a false limit and to
block movement of carriage control
lever A.
C43-2 With clapper M manually held against its
core and the lateral play of latch G taken
up toward the right side frame, there should
be .003" to .010" clearance between the
right side of latch G and the right end of
cutout E. With side L retained by latch G,
lip L should have at least 1/2 hold on ear B.
To adjust, weave latch G laterall y as required.
Reason: To ensure slide L being held by
latch G,
C43 -3 With slide L latched by latch G, tab lever
Q and return lever 0 should have a full contact with lips D and H.
To Adjust, recheck C43 -2 and, if necessary,
weave tab lever Q and/or return lever O.
Reason: To prevent depression of tab and
return keys when slide L is in its latched
position.
C43 -4 With latch G limiting in bottom of CUIout E and an .006" gauge inserted between
ear of latch G and actuator of switch R, the
normally closed points of switch R should
not open. Inserting a .014" gauge should
open the normally closed points of switch R.
To Adjust, loosen screws holding switch R
and reposition switch.
Reason: To ensure contact of the normally
cbsed points of switch R with solenoid K
energized.
L===9""'F-r-::'--=-=-;;?<
Fig. III-ll
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C43-1 With lever A forward and solenoid clapper M manually held against its core, there
should be passing clearance not to exceed
.010" between the bottom of lip C and the
top of ear B, and there should be .005" to
. 010" clearance between the end of slide L
and lever A when the lateral play of lever
A is taken up to the right.
Sec. III
=.S.=.ec;:...::.....=I;:::II'--_________----C:B_u_rroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
11
DECIMAL INDICA TOR LAMPS
A
The purpose of the decimal indicator lamps
is to aid the operator in locating the decimal
point when indexing the multiplier or multiplicand into the "D" section of the machine. The
location of the light is determined by electrical
lane pins in lane 64,65 or neither. Pins in these
lanes in no way effect the multiplication routine.
It is possible to change the physical location of
the lamps, however no more than three can be
installed in any machine.
B
c
MAGNETIC CLUTCH AND FULL POWER SWITCH
Fig. III-13
I
The magnetic clutch supplies the power for
carriage movement. The full power switch
applies full power to the magnetic clutch when
carriage movement is indexed. As a tab or return funCtion is indexed, escapement pawl E
moves away from the escapement gear, bellcrank
D pivots away from the lip on actuator B, and
spring C moves actuator B rearward to transfer
the points of switch A (S257).
D
c
E
Fig. III-12
Fig. III-14
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
P22 -1 During the indexing of a tab or return
there should be .025" to .35" rearward movement of slide B after contacts of switch A
have been transferred for "full power".
To Adjust, bend rear formed ear of slide B
as required.
Reason: To ensure positive transfer of switch
A (S257).
P22 -2 With the power on and full power switch
(S257) normal, a) there should be 36 to 42
volts, measured across the brushes of the
magnetic clutch. b) using the same measuring points, With S257 transferred, there
should be 75 to 85 volts.
Printed in U. S. America
12-1-62
To Adjust, a) on rear inserted panel machine
reposition the band on R232. (Not adjustable on side inserted panel machine) b)
repOSition the band on R231.
NOTE: On side inserted panel machine, removal of the panel opens the B+
circuit to the magnetic clutch.
Reason: To establish correct operating
voltages of the magnetic clutch.
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
12
FULL POWER INTERLOCK SWITCH
The full power inter10ck switch E removes
power from the magnetic clutch when the control
unit is removed from the machine. With the control unit in the machine roller F rides on the caSting to hold lever G clear of actuator C. Removal
of the control unit allows compression spring B to
force the long ear of lever G downward against
actuator C transferring switch E. The short ear of
lever G latches bearing cage A in the right end
position.
A
Sec. III
Reason: To retain the ball bearing cage in
the correct position for inserting the program unit.
CF "A" NEGATIVE SWITCH S234
This switch is actuated as the pinions of CF
" A" cross -slide when a total or subtotal is taken
from the minus pinions of the accumulator.
As the pinions cross-slide arm A is pivoted
forward transferring the points of switch E (S234)
through stud G, bail C and actuator D.
c
G-~1'8
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Fig. III -16
CI0-3-19 The movement of interlock G in locking the ball bearing cage A should cause the
actuator C to depress the plunger of switch E
and stop the current flow through the coil of
the magnetiC clutch.
To Adjust: Move actuator C up or down as
required and lock in position with the locking nuts D on the sleeve of the actuator
assembly.
Reason: To stop the current flow through the
coil of the magnetic clutch, when the program unit is removed, and the carriage is
in its loc ked position.
CI0-3-18 With the carriage in the extreme right
position, and the program unit removed, the
ball bearing cage A on the third rail must be
blocked by interlock G.
To Adjust: weave ear of interlock G as required.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A43-1 With a minus amount (credit) in crossfooter "A" and a crossfooter "A" total or
subtotal indexed, manually cycle the
machine until arm C receives its maximum
forward movement. There should be .015"
to .030" additional movement required before the actuator of switch E bottoms.
To Adjust, weave arm C as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring the points
of switch S234 without overdriving the
actuator.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
13
NEGATIVE MULTIPLY RELEASE SWITCH
CF "A" SUBTRACT SWITCH
The purpose of the negative multiply release
switch (S231) is to open the hold circuit for K204
(Negative Multiply) during product transfer. It is
located on the right auxiliary side frame.
At the beginning of the product transfer cycle
as link A moves forward, lip B on link A contacts
the plunger of switch C (S231) to transfer its contacts.
The CF "A" Subtract switch (S256) is located on the right auxiliary side frame. It is
actuated by the transfer machanism and will
cause the product of multiplication to be subtracted if negative multiplication (K204) is
called for. As transfer link A moves forward,
lip C moves away from the plunger of switch B
to allow the contacts of the switch B to restore.
A
B
I
B
Fig. III-17
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A42-1 With the machine manually cycled during
a product transfer and transfer link A at its
maximum forward position, there should be
• 025" to .030" clearance between the body
of switch C and lip B.
To Adjust, bend lip B as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring switch C without overdriving its plunger.
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
Fig. III-IS
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A23-7 With the machine and the transfer mechanism normal, there should be .040" to .050"
clearance between lip C of link A and the
body of switch B •
To Adjust, bend lip C as required.
Reason: To ensure transferring switch B without overdriving the switch plunger.
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
14
INDEXING OF CF "A" SUBTRACT AND RED
RmBON
When solenoid G (L232) is energized (due
to "Negative Multiply") clapper F through link D
will position pawls lover the ears of tappets Band
A (lanes 7 and 12) preventing their upward movement which will index CF "A" subtract and red
ribbon.
A
I
Sec. III
To Adjust, reposition the support bracket for
shaft J vertically as required.
Reason: To ensure proper throw of CF "A"
subtract and red ribbon mechanism with
solenoid G energized.
C44 -1-3 With link D limiting against ear E, there
should be .015" to .020" passing clearance
between the ears of tappets A and B and pawls
I, with the play of tappets A and B held
toward pawls I. There should also be clearance between pawls I and the return paddle.
To Adjust, weave ear E as required.
Reason: To prevent indexing the mechanisms
with clapper F normal and to have minimum
air gap.
IN -TAB SWITCHES
The in -tab switches are used for circuit control when the carriage is out of stop position. On
5/8" tab machines in-tab switches E (S227) and D
(S226) are mounted on the left side of the gear
box and are operated by lever A which is rocked
by drive trip interlock C. If either of the gear
box bumpers are lowered or if they are spread,
the points of the in -tab switches will be transferred.
Fig. III-19
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C44-1-1 With the clapper F held against its
core, pawls I should have full hold on the
ears of tappets A and B.
To Adjust, pOSition bracket H as required.
Reason: To establish the correct actuated
position of pawls lover the ears of tappets
A and B.
C44-1-2 With the control panel removed and
carriage controls active, manually trip the
drive. Holding clapper F against its core,
manually cycle the machine. The CF
subtract hook should have a three quarter
(3/4) hold on the square stud in the control
slide.
E
Fig. IlI-20
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
G1-1 With carriage gear box bumpers normal,
there should be .005" to .010" clearance
between nylon actuator of switch D and the
lip of bail A.
To Adjust, move mounting bracket for
switches D and E and/or weave tail of bail
A.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
Reason: To ensure immediate actuation of
switch E and to allow switch D to close at
normal.
On 1/10" tab machines in -tab switches are
located to the left of the gear box and are operated either by spearpoint K or arm H(tab and return). Rearward movement of spearpoint K
through arm J and ears G transfers switches F.
Indexing a tab or return function causes arm H to
move forward pivoting lever I, which through
the spring connection to arm .J causes ears G to
transfer switches F.
15
C36 -2 With the spearpoint held forward and a
tab or return manually indexed, the "InTab" switches should be actuated by the ear
of arm H. When the primary latch on the
gear box is released, the slight rearward
movement of the interlock latch should not
allow the switches to transfer.
To Adjust, recheck C36-1.
Reason: To establish correct position of
switches for interlocking during tab and return operations.
C36 -3 With the program unit removed and the
machine normal, there should be .010" to
. 015" clearance between outer ear G and the
switch bracket.
To Adjust, weave the lip on arm J where contact is made with spearpoint K.
Reason: To correctly actuate the in-tab
switches when the carriage is in or out of
a stop position.
G
MOTOR FRICTION CLUTCH
Fig. III-21
The motor friction clutch is a protective
device which prevents serious damage to the machine in case of lock-ups and cushions the initial
movement of mechanisms as the drive is engaged.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: The following tests and adjUstments
should be made only after all tabulation
and return interlock adjustments have
been properly made.
C36 -1 With the program unit removed and spearpoint K manually held forward, there should
be clearance, not to exceed • 005", between
the plungers of switches F and ears G when
lever I is held against arm H.
To Adjust, reposition the switch bracket as
required for necessary clearance of the inner switch plunger (S227), maintaining the
parallel condition of the switch assembly.
If necessary bend arm H. Bend outer ear
G for necessary clearance of the outer
switch plunger (S226).
Reason: To establish the correct position of
the in-tab switch assembly.
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
P13-1-1 The motor friction clutch shOUld be as
weak as possible, yet strong enough to accomplish all machine functions.
To Adjust: 1. With the clutch cool, back
off adjusting nut until the product accumu1ator fails to cycle on a 20 place clear
operation.
2. Permit the clutch to slip for approximately 15 seconds.
3. Tighten adjusting nut until the clutch
will cycle the product accumulator during
a 20 place clear operation.
4. Tighten adjusting nut three (3) additional notches.
Reason: To safeguard the machine against
possible damage in the event of a malfunction.
Note: On some machines it may be necessary
to remove one flat spring.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
16
GEAR BOX
Sec. III
o
B
,~""""'--E
E
G
The F2000 gear box is basically the same as
the FlOOO with the following exceptions. The
Tab and Return spindles are mounted on the back
plate of the gear box and each is individually
driven from a common drive shaft. The Tab and
Return spindles are supported by needle bearings.
Pulley D is belt driven from the magnetic clutch.
Rotation of pulley D results is rotation of gears G
through their common shaft H. Gears G drive
gears A.
TEST AND ADJUSTMENTS
C 13 -1-32 Gear shaft H should turn freely and
gears G should have equal depth mesh with
gears A.
Fig. III-22
To Adjust, a) With carriage return indexed,
turn adjusting nut E (right side) for minimum
clearance between right spacer F and ear I
which will allow free rotation of return
spindle B and shaft H.
b) With carriage tabulation indexed, turn
adjusting nut E (left side) for minimum
clearance between the left spacer F and
casting C which will allow free rotation
of the tab spindle and shaft H.
Reason: To establish the correct location of
gears G with respect to gears A.
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
17
LANE 32 - PRORA TE
Used in prorating to the nearest dollar by
preventing columns 1 and 2 from extending or
printing an amount. As a #3 pin is sensed by
tappet B, add racks D are blocked by slide H
from arm E, link G, lever A and cam C.
B--~I
I
Fig. III-23
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A38-1 With carriage controls active and a No.3
pin in lane 32, manually cycle the machine
until the roll in sensing lever A is on the high
point of cam C. There should be • 045" to
. 060" clearance between the top edge of
slide H and the bottom horizontal surface of
extensions D.
To Adjust, turn eccentric F as required.
Reason: To ensure sufficient hold of blocking slide H on add rack extensions D.
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
A38-2 With carriage controls active and a No.3
pin in lane 32, manually cycle the machine
until the roll of sensing lever A is on the high
point of cam C. There should be clearance
not to exceed. 005", between blocking slide
H and the vertical surface of the projections
on the lower side of add rack extensions D.
To Adjust, weave support bracket for blocking slide H, maintaining freedom of slide
H to move up or down.
Reason: To ensure free entry of the studs of
the add rack latches into the cipher spaces
of their lock plates for columns 1 and 2
when prorating.
For Form 3747
18
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
OPERAND STORAGE UNIT
The function of the operand storage unit is
to store the multiplicand and the multiplier. Located in the D section of the Sensimatic, the unit
is in constant mesh with the add racks. A #2 pin
in lane 33 or 34 of the control unit will allow an
amount to be indexed in the multiplicand or multiplier section of the operand storage unit. Early
in the machine cycle sensing lever D raises bellcrank C, bellcrank C pulls link F rearward rocking bellcrank G which raises detent bail K. This
permits springs L, which couple pinions A to
pinions B, to restore the contact gears J to the
neutral position. (Contact gears J have wiper
contacts facing the printed circuit boards, which
index circuits that represent the multiplicand and
the multiplier.) As the machine cycle continues,
the add racks are driven forward rotating pinions
A which, through springs L, turn pinions B, driving contact gears J to position their contacts on
the printed circuit boards I. After the stud of the
add racks enter the lock plates the sensing lever
D is allowed to restore. From the tension of
spring H the detent bail K is poSitioned in the
tooth space of contact gears J, holding them in
a fixed position. As the racks are restored to
normal, pinions A will be rotated to home position. Since contact gears J are held by detent
bail K, pinions B will also be held and springs L
will be wound up. When detent bail K is raised
again, contact gears J will be restored to the
same position that pinion A is in, through the
tension of springs L.
Sec. III
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
R5-6 With the machine clear and no amounts
indexed, cycle the machine until the locking studs have entered the lock plates fully.
When manually raised and lowered in this
position, the fingers of detent bail K should
enter between the marked teeth of contact
gears J with minimum rotation of gears J.
To Adjust, reposition operand storage unit
forward or rearward as required.
Reason: To ensure proper positioning of the
Operand Storage Unit.
R-5 -9 With detent bail K limiting in the tooth
spaces of pinions J and the upward play of
bellcrank C taken up, there should be line
to line contact between bellcrank C and
limit blank E.
To Adjust, position limit blank E as required.
Reason: To ensure positive detenting of contact gears J with bail K lowered and free
rotation with bail K raised.
R-5-10 With the machine normal, there should
be clearance, not to exceed. 003", between
bellcranks C and sensing levers D.
To Adjust, weave bellcranks C as required.
Reason: To ensure sufficient throw to raise
detent bail K out of mesh with pinions J
without raising the tappets at normal.
E
Fig. III-24
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
PRINTED CIRCUIT SWITCH ASSEMBLY
This assembly is made up of six printed
circuit switches controlled by lanes 41 through
44.
Fig. I11-25
19
ing lever L. As cam J continues to rotate to
home position cam follower assembly K will be
restored to normal by the roll on adjustable link
H.
The sensing of pins in lane 42 positions the
wiper of printed circuit switch S261. The sensing of pins in lane 43 positions the Wipers of
printed circuit switches S262 and S263. Sensing levers C and D of lanes 42 and 43 are held
at normal by arm F which is latched down by
clapper P. When solenoid 0 is energized, it
will attract clapper P, releasing arm F. The
spring on the lower projection of arm F will cause
arm F to pivot on shaft G and raise pivot point E
of sensing levers C and D. As control pins are
sensed by tappets A and B, which are moved upward by springs Q. sensing levers C and D, pivoting at stud E, position the wipers of the printed
circuit switches as determined by the length of
the control pin. Tappets A and B are restored to
normal when cam M contacts the roll in the
J.ower projection of arm F and relatches arm F on
clapper P.
G
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C37 -6 With the machine normal, printed circuit
assembly D should be centrally aligned with
the sensing levers and should be squarely
mounted. With control pins active in lanes
41, 42, 43 or 44, release the sensing levers
of these lanes and check to determine if the
wipers are centered on the pads of the printed circuits.
To Adjust, loosen screws E and position
assembly D as required. Readjust lane.
41 if required.
Reason: To ensure that wiper contacts are
centered on the printed circuit pads.
Fig. III-26
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
LANES 41, 42 and 43
The sensing of pins in lane 41 positions the
wiper of printed circuit switch S260. As cam J
is rotated, cam follower assembly K raises the
pivot point of sensing lever L and allows tappet
N to move upward to sense the control pin. When
a control pin is contacted by tappet N, sensing
lever L pivots at its stud connection with cam
follower K and positions the wiper for S260, which
is connected to the stud in the right end of sensPrinted in U.S. America
H
12-1-62
C3 7 -5 With the auxiliary senSing unit in normal
position and a No. 1 pin in lane 41, there
should be .030" to .050" clearance between
tappet N and the No. 1 pin.
To Adjust, turn eccentric I in arm H as required.
Reason: To maintain proper clearance between tappet N and control pins in lane 41.
For Form 3747
I
20
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
C37 -7 With control pins active in lane 41, cycle
the auxiliary sensing unit until lane 41 is
fully actuated. Check the wiper contact on
S260 to determine if it is centered on the
pads of the printed circuit.
To Adjust, recheck adjustment (C37-6) of
the Printed Circuit Switch Assembly.
Reason: To ensure that the wiper contacts
are centered on the printed circuit pads.
R
Sec. III
As a pin is sensed by tappet R through spring S,
arm Q is pivoted at stud L; this positions the
wipers of S264 and S265 through stud M.
As spring N raises arm J, screw H releases
latch F allowing spring X to position slide D to
the left, transferring the points of switch A (S243).
When the sensing camshaft is rotated, cam
o will reset arms Q and J through roller K and
stud L. Arm J being latched by clapper latch V
from tension of spring U.
Slide D is reset by roller P on cam 0 which
pivots arm E moving slide D to the right
through stud W where it is latched by part F and
spring G.
A
M
T
N
Fig. III -27
C37-1 With arm Rand F released, there should
be .040" to .060" air gap between the solenoid cores (L225 and L231) and the nonmagnetic pads on their clappers P and V.
To Adjust, position limit blanks T as required.
Reason: To ensure sufficient hold on latch
arms Rand F (lanes 42, 43 and 44) at
normal and to permit relatching.
C37-2 With clapper P or V held against its core,
there should be .005" to .015" releasing
clearance with latch arm F or R.
To Adjust, reposition bracket S.
Reason: To ensure positive release of latch
arms F and R.
LANE 44 AND DECIMAL SHIFT ENABLE SWITCH
Lane 44 is used to position the wiper on
printed circuit switches S264 and S265 and cause
the transfer of decimal shift enable switch S243.
When solenoid T (L225) is energized, it
will attract its clapper V releasing latch arm 1.
Spring N swings arm J upward until roller K
limits on cam O. With arm J in this position,
the pivot point of arm Q is raised through stud L.
Fig. III-28
Tests and Adjustments
C37-3 With the machine at home position and
latch arm J manually released, there should
be .005" to .015" releasing clearance between latch F and ear Ion slide D.
To Adjust, turn eccentric screw H in arm J
as required.
Reason: To ensure a positive release of slide
D as late as possible.
C37-4 With slide D released by latch F, there
should be .020" to .025" clearance between
ear C and switch actuator B.
To Adjust, reposition switch A as required.
Reason: To ensure transfer of switch A when
slide D is released.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
ELECTRICAL LANE SWITCHES
Six electrical lane switches provide a means
of controlling certain electrical functions. These
switches are located at the rear of the auxiliary
sensing unit and are controlled by the last six
lanes of the control panel. Pins of only one
length are used since the switches are toggle
action, single pole, double throw type.
With the lane switch actuators A, normal,
springs G urge levers F against shaft E to depress
the switch plungers. In this manner, the contacts
of the lane switches are kept transferred when
there are no corresponding pins in the control
panel.
As a control pin depresses actuator A, lever
F is rocked by the stud in the actuator to clear
the switch plunger. This permits the switch contacts to return to normal.
21
C37-11 With a control pin positioned directly
over actuator A. there should be approximately 3/32" clearance between the switch
plunger and lever F. but the actuator should
not be bottomed. Make this test with the
carriage at each end and in a central position.
To Adjust. turn eccentrics B as required and
repeat C37-10.
Reason: To ensure proper depression of
actuators A by control pins.
I
';'~~D
B~~
Fig. 111-2'
C
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C37-10 With machine turned on to apply "hold"
power to the carriage. actuators A should be
centrally aligned with the control pins.
To Adjust. loosen ~crews C and D slightly
and move the switch assembly laterally.
as required. It rna y be necessary in some
instances to weave individual control pins.
Reason: To ensure full actuation of switches
by the proper control pins.
Printed in U,S, America
12-1-62
C14-5-4 Switch actuators A must be centrally
aligned with their respective control pins in
lanes 61 and 66,
To Adjilst, loosen four (4) screws I and reposition the switch assembly forward or rearward
as required.
REASON: To ensure alignment of the control
pins and actuators A.
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
22
COMPUTER TIMING CAM ASSEMBLY
The purpose of the computer timing cam
assembly is to provide the timing of electrical
functions during the multiply routine. It is
turned 180 0 during the right-hand platen stroke
and 180 0 during the left-hand platen stroke.
The timing cam shaft D is turned by pulley
H which is connected to the computer drive by
a timing belt.
Sec. III
Reasoll: To ensure proper timing of the cam
switches without straining the timing cam
belt.
SENSllvlATIC TIMING CAM ASSEMBLY
The Sensimatic timing cam assembly provides
electrical timing based upon the relative position
of the Sensimatic camshaft.
Timing camshaft H is turned by gear C,
which is turned by pulley B. This pulley is connee ted to the Sensimatic camshaft by timing
belt A and pulley J.
D
F
Fig. III-31
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Fig. III-30
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A2 -1-10 (a) The timing cam belt should be
snug without binding the bearing points.
(b) With the multiplier drive de tented in
home position, the pilot holes in the timing
cams should align with holes E in bracket A.
To Adjust, (a) loosen screws B and pivot
bracket A as required.
(b) loosen nuts F and move adjusting plate G as required.
If necessary remesh the timing belt.
P25-1-1 With the machine normal, (a) there
should be a minimum amount of slack in
driving belt A and (b) the pilot holes in the
cams should align with hole G.
To Adjust, (a) loosen front and rear screws
which hold bracket D to the
left auxiliary sideframe and
position as .required;
(b) remesh pulley B wit~ timing
belt (for broad adjustment);
remesh gears Band G (for
intermediate adjustment);
tighten pulley J on sensimatic
camshaft using wrench in holes
I (for very fine adjustment) in
the order listed as required.
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
PULSE GENERA TOR
23
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
The pulse generator is a cam operated, circuit breaking device which applies to the compo ~
nents unit pu.1ses of varying length synchronized
with the rotation of the product accumulator pinion shaft. It is these pulses, routed by the components unit to the product accumulator pinion
solenoids, which affects the accumulation of
various numbers one through eight. The nine
pulse, which is the longest pulse required, is
generated by a timing cam switch (5209).
The pulse generator is attached to the outside of the left sideframe of the multiplier drive
unit. Cam D is located on the left end of the
dri ve unit,,~~aft which· turns the product accumu1ator pinion assembly. As cam D is rotated, the
lobe of the cam contacts nylon actuator Band
causes contact C to open.
A
A2-1-12 With nylon actuator B of each contact
assembly in turn located on the high point
of cam D, there should be .035" to .045"
clearance between contacts C.
To Adjust, weave stationary contacts as required.
Reason: To ensure proper pulse length.
A2 -1-13 With contacts C closed, a pressure of
75,to 150 grams, slowly applied to nylon
actuator B, should be required to open the
contacts. Use gram gauge Kit 408 No.2.
To Adjust, replace backup leaf A and/or
contact assembly B as required.
Reason: To provide uniform contact pressure.
A2 -5 With cam D positioned. 015" from the
nylon actuator of the No. 1 contact, index
1,234,567.89 as the multiplicand and 1 as
the multiplier. Manually operate the machine through a multiply routine and observe
when the product accumulator pinion clappers
are released. At this point the clapper should
cover the flat surface of the pinion ratchet
gear within"!: 1/32".
To Adjust, reposition cam D.
Reason: To synchronize the opening of contacts C with the rotation of the product
accumulator pinion shaft.
'--_-B
Fig. III-32
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
24
Sec. III
DRIVE UNIT ASSEMBL Y
The drive unit is used to furnish and control
power to the components unit and the product
accumulator. The drive unit is controlled by a
solenoid operated clutch. Tripping of the drive,
which is belt driven from the constant running
sensimatic motor, results in one cycle of the
product accumulator and one-half cycle of the
components unit.
Ad
~-"'"
o
Fig. III-33
When the computer clutch solenoid P is
energized, plunger assembly 0 pulls release bail
N rearward (through the connecting pin). Pivoting on its shoulder screw, the forward projection
of release bail N is rocked below the foot of
clutch dog G. Spring S on the clutch dog, pulls
the engaging tooth of the clutch dog into mesh
with the constant running clutch spline F. Limit
M on plunger assembly 0 prevents a premature
release of clutch dog G by blocking the downward
movement of the hooked portion of release bail
N. The enlarged hole in release bail N allows
limit M to be moved rearward, by plunger assembly 0, out of the path of the hooked portion of
release bail N when solenoid P is energized.
The clutch dog is attached to cam E. Cam
E is attached to a drive unit assembly made up
of cam E,gear V, segment gear mounting blank T
and segment gear U, Segment gear U pivots at
point B; its movement is controlled by roller W
riding in enclosed cam A, and by the rotation of
its mounting blank T. If the segment gear U was
not allowed to float on its mounting blank T,
gear Y would ma~e a full rotation at the same
speed as gear V •.l!lf.Since segment gear U floats,
Fig. III-34
and is controlled through roller W, and cam A,
and due to the configuration of cam A, a reverse,
forward, reverse and then forward motion is imparted to gear Y. Gear Y turns gear X through
their common shaft to supply power to the product
accumulator pinion shaft.
Gear V meshes with gear AK to drive the
main camshaft of the product accumulator
through gears AI. AI and coupler member AH.
Power to turn the computer timing cams is
supplied by pulley AB which is pinned to the same
shaft as gear AC. Gear AC is turned by the smaller gear AF on gear AE. Gear AF is driven by
idler gear AG from gear V.
Power is supplied to the components unit
platen camshaft through coupler member AD
from ge'" AE.
AL
AQ
A~
~~~
~~
AP~,,('i::lAN
Fig. In-35
~
AO
~
Coupler member AL supplies constant power
to the components unit clutch drive shaft. The
coupler member is pinned to shaft AN which is
turned by gear AQ from gear AM. Gear AM is
driven by belt H from pulley I.
Sec. In
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
The first four adjustments are for the
proper assembly of the drive unit. They
need be made only if it has been necessary to disassemble the drive.
A2-1-1 The high side of eccentric screw in D
should be in its extreme downward position.
To Adjust, turn eccentric screw as required.
Reason: Basic adjustment to enable proper
meshing of the drive gears.
A2 -1-2 With detent roll of arm C in the pocket
of cam E, punch mark on gear V should align
with the punch mark on gear A K.
To Adjust, remesh gear AK as required.
Reason: Basic adjustment for proper timing
relationship between the component unit
and product Accumulator.
A2-1-3 With the punch mark on gear V aligned
with the punch mark on gear AK, the studs
in the hub of gear assembly AH should align
vertically with the punch marked stud towards gear Y.
To Adjust, remesh gear AI with gear AJ.
Reason: Basic adjustment for the home position of the product accumulator.
A2-1-4 With detent roll of arm C in the pocket
of cam E, the punch mark on gear Y should
align with the punch mark on segment gear
U.
To Adjust, remesh gear Y with segment gear
NOTE:
U.
Reason: To permit proper meshing of pinion
cluster drive gear with the drive rack.
A2-1-5 With clutch dog G disengaged in home
position, release bail N should have. 070" to
.080" hold on clutch dog G.
To Adjust, turn eccentric shoulder screw Q
as required.
Reason: To ensure disengaging clutch and
have minimum air gap.
A2-1-6 a) With the roller of detent a~m C in the
pocket of cam E and release bail N limiting
against eccentric Q. there should be .OOS"
to .009" clearance (. 007" nominal) between
release bail N and the top of limit M.
(b) With the roller of detent arm C limiting
on cam E just prior to dropping into the
pocket and with solenoid plunger 0 bottomed,
there should be .01S" to .020" clearance
between clutch dog G and release bail N.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
25
To Adjust, a) loosen screw L and position
blank K as required.
b) reposition solenoid bracket R as required,
maintaining freedom of plunger O. Recheck
step (a).
Reason: To establish correct relationship
between release bail N and plunger assembly O.
A2-1-7 With the drive unit in home position,
clutch dog G disengaged, and solenoid
plunger 0 normal, the inner edge of the
hooked portion of release bail N must have
a flush hold with the rear edge of limit M.
To Adjust, rotate eccentric sleeve J as required.
Reason: To ensure minimum air gap for
solenoid plunger assembly O.
A2-1-8 With the play of gear V taken up in home
position in the direction of normal rotation,
there should be .010" to .01S" clearance
between the roller of detent arm C and the
edge of the drop off of detent cam E.
To Adjust, turn the eccentric' screw holding
the roller of detent arm C as required.
Reason: To ensure detenting the drive unit
in home position without excessive play.
A2 -1-11 Belt H should be snug without binding
the bearing points.
To Adjust, loosen screws AO and with a spring
scale in the upper screw slot, position
bracket AP for 1/2 lb. pull against belt H.
Reason: To ensure positive drive without
straining belt H or cramping the bearing.
For Form 3747
I
26
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
COMPONENTS UNIT
The components unit is located behind the product accumulator, below the add rack extensions,
in the "F" section of the F2000. It is an electromechanical unit whose purpose is to route pulses
from the pulse generator to the product accumulator. The unit consists of four clutch assemblies,
two disk assemblies and two types of sensing switch
assemblies.
CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES
The clutch assemblies provide a means of positioning the discs in the disc assemblies. The
clutch is indexed electrically by a solenoid and
power is supplied by a constant running belt and
pulley assembly which works off the Computer
drive. The disks are moved from one pOSition to
the next in twenty-five milliseconds.
A
Sec.
m
As the clutch shaft rotates, roll P on bail Q
rides up the inclined surface of snailback cam C,
causing bail Q to pivot and transfer interlock
switches U. As roll P reaches the high point of cam
C, latch S is positioned over latch bail R (riveted
to bail Q) to hold the switches transferred while the
clutch is engaged.
In order to disengage the clutch members, solenoid B is de -energized to allow reset arm J to return (by spring tension) against clutch member E.
As the clutch shaft continues to rotate, reset arm
J cams clutch members E and F apart, by contact ing the cam surface of member E. As the members disengage, member E contacts the tail of
latch S to release latch bail R and allow the clutch
to detent in home position.
G
E
B
u
T
H
S
Fig. III -37
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
RI0-l (a) With the clutch shaft held tight against
nylon bearing H, on the pulley end of the shaft,
reset bail J should have .003" to .006" clearFig. III-36
ance with the flange of driven member E at
any pOSition during rotation except when camWhen clutch solenoid B is energized, clapper L
contacts clutch reset arm J, pivoting it down out of
ming the clutch members apart.
engagement with clutch member E. This allows
(b) Total end play of the clutch shaft should
not exceed. 006". (Some end play is required).
spring D to engage clutch members E and F. Pulley G through clutch member F turns clutch memTo Adjust: (a) Place. 011" shims (811 1/2) or
.006" shims (8823 1/2) as required between
ber E. Clutch member E is keyed to cam C,
pinned clutch collar I and nylon bearing H.
which is pinned to the clutch shaft. One half cycle
(b)
Place shims as required between the worm
of the clutch shaft advances the disk, or disks, one
gear
on the clutch shaft and nylon bearing.
position.
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
27
each home position and each switch plunger
Reason: To ensure positioning reset bail J clear
of the flange on member E as clutch solenoid
manually bottomed, there should be .005" to
B is de-energized and to have free running
• DID" clearance between the switch actuator
clutch shaft without excessive free play of
and the switch plunger.
To Adjust, weave switch actuator as required.
disks.
Reason: To ensure transferring the switch withR10-2: With the clutch disengaged in home posout overdriving the switch plunger.
ition, there should be .030" to .060" clearance
R10-7: With clapper L held against clutch solebetween the mounting bracket and latch arm S.
To Adjust, loosen bracket mounting screws and
noid B, reset bail J should clear driven clutch
member E by .030" to .040".
reposition bracket as required.
TO Adjust, weave tip of clapper L as required.
Reason: To prevent a false limit of clutch memReason: To provide proper indexing and reber E in reset position and to ensure releasing
leasing of clapper L and reset bail J.
latch arm S in time to allow roll P on eccenR10-S: With the clutch disengaged in home postric 0 to detent cam C smoothly without
ition and clapper L limiting against limit blank
binding.
K, there should be .120" to .130" (approxiXR10-3: With the high side of eccentric screw 0
mately l/S") clearance between clapper Land
.
toward cam C and toward the end of detent
reset bail J.
bail Q. latch arm S should latch bail R with no
To Adjust, weave limit blank K as required.
more than. 004" latching lead when the detent
Reason: To ensure full release of reset bail J
roller is on either high point of cam C. With
through momentum of clapper L without exthe clutch disengaged in each home position
cessive air gap.
and the end play of driving member F taken up
toward driven member E, there should be not
less than .005" clearance between the teeth of
the clutch members.
To Adjust, turn eccentric screw O· as required.
Reason: To ensure latching detent arm S, to
prevent excessive bounce of interlock switches
U, to ensure driving clutch home through
momentum, and to prevent clutch teeth from
rubb.ing when disengaged.
R10-4: With the clutch disengaged there should be
at least. 005" clearance between the forward
end of reset bail J and clutch driven member E.
To Adjust. recheck R10-2 and R10-3 and readjust, if necessary.
Reason: To prevent driving clutch member E
into a bind against the end of reset bail J.
X'R10-5: With roll P of detent arm Q on the high
point of cam C (left hand clutches) and the
interlock switches manually bottomed, there
should be .005" to .010" clearance between
the switch plunger and the fingers of the switch
actuators.
To Adjust, weave the fingers of the switch actuator as required.
Reason: To prevent a false limit of the left
hand interlock switches at normal and to ensure transferring the switches when actuated.
~R10-6: With the right hand clutches disengaged in
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
28
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
DISK ASSEMBLIES:
The components unit contains two printed circuit disk assemblies; the function table assembly
and the shifter assembly. Each assembly consists
of three printed circuit disks. The two outer disks
(A and D) of each assembly are pinned to the disk
shaft and positioned mechanically by a gear on the
disk shaft similiar to C and a clutch worm similar
to G. Center disk B is mechanically independent
of the other disks and is positioned by gear C and
worm G. The positioning of these disks (A and B)
is controlled electrically and will determine
which pulse from the pulse generator is to be applied to a specific column or columns of the product accumulator.
A
Fig. III -38
SEN SIN G SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
There are two types of sensing switch assemblies in the components unit; the sensing contacts
(the platen) and the wiping contacts. The platen
is located between the right hand disks (A) and the
left hand disks (B). The platen is moved rearward
and then forward (by one revolution of the platen
camshaft) to sense the right and left hand disks respectively. Two cycles of the multiplier drive
are required to accomplish one revolution of the
platen camshaft. The wiping contacts are in constant contact with their respective disks to sense
and/or control the positioning of the disks.
Coupler V connects platen drive shaft T to the
multiplier drive unit. Each cycle of the drive
unit results in two and one -half revolutions of
drive shaft T. Five revolutions of drive shaft T.
through worm gear S and camshaft gear R. result
in one cycle of camshaft N. The 1800 rotation of
camshaft N by the first cycle of the drive unit,
Sec. III
causes platen P to move (through rolls L and brackets 0) rearward against disks A and back to normal
position. This is commonly called a right hand
platen stroke. The second cycle of the drive unit,
in a like manner, will cause the platen to move
forward against disks B and back to normal position. This is commonly called a left hand platen
stroke.
The wiping contact assemblies are in constant
contact with their respective printed circuit disks.
As the disks are pOSitioned, these contacts will
make or break various circuits to help control the
process of multiplication.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
NOTE: Before making any adjustment to the disks,
all adjustments for the clutches and the following
three adjustments should be checked.
Rll-3 With holes M in alignment, the open slot
of coupler plate V should be at 12 o'clock.
To Adjust, remesh gears Rand S as required.
REASON: To bring the platen camshaft within
the adjustment range of coupler V.
Rll-4 The platen camshaft assembly should be
free with no more than. 003" end play between
its support brackets.
To Adjust, reposition set collar Was required.
REASON: To maintain alignment of gears R
and S.
Rll-5 Platen drive shaft T should be free with no
more than • 003" end play.
To Adjust, reposition set collar U as required.
REASON: To prevent erratic platen timing.
Rll-1 In all positions, disks A and B should have
.025" to .035" play. measured on the circumference of the disks.
To Adjust, loosen screws H and position the
clutch unit for proper vertical mesh of gears
G and C.
REASON: To maintain alignment of the disks
and sensing contacts without binding the drive
gears.
Rll-2 With all disks home and the clutches disengaged. home position indication marks on
the right hand disks should align with the right
edge of the slots in the front and back plates
of the components unit facing the rear of the
machine. Use Kit F605.
To Adjust, slightly loosen screws H and turn
eccentric I as required. Recheck Rll-l.
29
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
REASON: To ensure that the left hand shifter
disk follows up proper! y.
Rll-I0 The contact fingers of wiper contacts E
should contact the disks with 18 to 20 grams
pressure (use gram guage kit #408 No. 2~.
To Adjust, bend the contact fingers at their
off-set.
REASON: To ensure uniform contact pressure
between wipers E and the printed circuit disks.
REASON: To establish proper relative starting
positions of disks.
Rll-7 With all clutch assemblies in home position' the pins of platen P should align with the
etched circuitry of the printed circuit disks.
To Adjust, (a) with eccentric guide post Q
loose to prevent interference, loosen platen
mounting screws K and position platen as required to align with right hand disks A.
L
I
w
~~~
,
(NOTE: In some cases it may be necessary to
reposition the right hand disks slightly). Retighten screws K and recheck alignment. (b)
Loosen screws H and turn eccentric I on the
left hand clutch assemblies to align left hand
disks B with the pins in platen P.
REASON: To ensure alignment of platen pins
and printed circuit disks for electrical continuity.
Rll-8 With the function table disks A and B both
located in position 3 or 7. the intermediate
length finger of wiper contact E should be approximately 1/16" from the edge of the printed
circuit breaker point (see left hand function
table follow -up circuit disk in Section VII).
To Adjust, loosen nut F and reposition wiper E
as required.
REASON: To ensure that the left hand function
table disk follows up properly.
Rll-9 With the shifter disks (A and B) both located in position 9 or 20, the intermediate
length finger of wiper contact E should be approximately 1/16" from the edge of the printed
circuit breaker point. (See left hand follow-up
circuit-shifter in Section VII).
To Adjust, loosen nut F and reposition wiper E
as required.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
'5
o
Fig. III -39
Rll-ll The wiping contact assembly which contacts the digit selector disk (back of left hand
shifter) should be positioned to the extreme
left (facing the rear of the unit).
To Adjust, loosen mounting screws and reposition as required.
REASON: To ensure proper timing of the Right
Hand Shifter clutch.
Rll-12 Timing belt X should be snug without
cramping the bearings.
To Adjust, loosen nuts Y and position bracket
Z as required.
REASON: To ensure positive drive to the component unit clutches without straining belt X.
Rll-6 Eccentric guide post Q should be centrally
located in the slot of platen P mounting plate.
To Adjust, turn eccentric guide post Q as required.
REASON: To maintain alignment between the
platen pins and the disks without restricting
normal platen movement.
X
y
Fig. III-40
z
For Form 3747
30
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
THE PRODUCT ACCUMULA TOR
The product accumulator provides an electromechanical means of accumulating the product of
multiplication. There are four steps required in
obtaining this product of multiplication in a usable
form. They are:
1. Accumulation of amounts, one to nine, on
individual pinions.
2. Carry mechanism; adding one to the next
left column when nine is exceeded on any
pinion.
3. Rounding off the product in the desired
column and clearing the rounded off column
and those to the right of it.
4. Transferring this product into the basic
machine.
D
Fig. 1II-41
IJ
the product accumulator camshaft is rotated cam
M through roller 0 pivots arm N upward. Since
arm N and reset arm Q are both pinned to shaft P,
reset arm Q will pivot upward, plunger L will contact clapper J and move the clapper against solenoid K. Due to the configuration of cam M reset
arm Q moves away from clapper J before pinion
shaft C starts its forward ~counterclockwise) rotation at approximately 73 of the product accumulator cycle. The pulse applied to solenoid K will
determine how long clapper J is held by solenoid
K and the amount accumulated (one through nine).
If no amount or an amount less than nine is to be
accumulated, clapper J wil1limit the rotation of
pinion ratchet gear D and cause clutch band B to
slip on clutch drum A •
.
o
M
F
,~G/
"\~
Sec. III
Q
I
ACCUMULATION OF AMOUNTS
As in other accumulating sections, amounts are
indexed into the product accumulator by rotating
the pinions. The degree of rotation indicates the
number accumulated. The power for pinion rotation is derived from gear H (on the multiplier
drive unit) to gear G and shaft C. Each individual
pinion is connected to shaft C by a slip clutch.
the clutch drum A is pinned to shaft C. Clutch
band B is connected to the pinion assembly by the
stud in D. At normal clapper J is located against
pinion ratchet gear D. In order to rotate the pinion, clapper J must be moved away from gear D
and held away until the proper number has been
accumulated. Due to the large air gap between
clapper J and solenoid K, the strong restoring
spring on clapper J and the small VOltage (hold
voltage only) applied to solenoid K, it is necessary to mechanically reset the clappers against
their solenoid cores. As the clappers are being
reset, gear H through gear G imparts a reverse
rotation (backup) of 12 0 to pinion shaft C. This
reverse (clockwise) rotation is necessary to allow
clapper J to catch the same tooth of gear D if no
amount is to be accumulated in that column. As
Fig. III-42
Rebound of clapper reset arms Q and possible
interference with the return of clapper J to the
proper step of ratchet gear D is prevented by two
trap-latches S. At normal traplatch S is held out
of the path of ear T 9'inned to shaft P) by cam R.
At approximately 20 cam R releases traplatch S.
When clapper reset shaft P restores to normal, at
approximately 500 , traplatch S moves behind ear
T to prevent rebound. This is the add portion
(0 0 - 230 0 ) of the product accumulator cycle and
is followed immediately by the carry portion.
L
s
T
Fig. III-43
Surroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A36-2 There should be .002" to .008" end play
of the total bail shaft, the carry reset shaft,
the transfer shaft, the clapper reset shaft and
the product accumulator camshaft between the
sideframes of the product accumulator.
To Adjust, add the following shims as required:
8111/2 (.006"), FXl-32 (.005"), FXl-93
(.008"), FXl-64 (.011") or FXl-94 (.006").
Note: Shims for the carry reset shaft should
be placed next to the left side frame and for
the camshaft next to the right side frame.
Reason: To maintain alignment of component
parts.
A36-20 Trap latch pawl 8 should have at least
' '" should
a full side hold on cam Rand spring U
clear adjacent p a r t s . "
To Adjust, position trap latch bracket as required.
Reason: To ensure proper actuation of the
trap latch assembly.
THE CARRY MECHANISM
The high speed of the product accumulator
can be attributed in part to its unique carry
mechanism. All carries, direct or relay, occur
simultaneously. This system requires not only an
indication of direct carries but also an indication
of which pinions, if any, are in the nine position
(for relay carries). These indications are provided by positioning carry wipers W on the printed circuit board as shown. The "A" pads are
"dead" and have no electrical function. They
are present only to prevent wear of the printed
circuit board by wipers W. All pads "S" are
connected in common to the normally open
contact of timing cam switch 8208, which supplies the carry pulse (2760 to 3400 ). Pads "C"
are connected through pads "D" to the dropping
resistor of the next left adjacent pinion solenoid.
LNUMBER
, 2,NINE
31
With the carry mechanism normal (0 through
8 on the pinion) pads "A" are bridged by carry
wiper W. When there is a nine on the pinion
pads "C" and "E" are bridged. When a carry
has been initiated, wiper W will be positioned to
bridge pads "B" and "C". As can be seen by the
illustration of these three conditions, the carry
pulse received on the "S" pads is bridged, in the
carry position to the "D" and "E" pads of the next
left pinion. If this next left pinion is in the nine
position ("C" and "E" pads bridged) the "D" and
"E" pads of the second left pinion will also
receive the carry pulse. In this manner direct
and relay carries are accomplished simultaneously
using the same pulse.
At the beginning of the product accumulator
cycle (add portion) reset arms AE move carry
wiper positioning arms AS (commonly called the
hatchet) upward. Hatchet AB moving upward
contacts stud Z in carry latch Y to reset the carry
latch in front of latch bail X (carry reset). By
550 carry reset arms AE have moved into the
initial carry position and will remain in this position (Fig. III -45) until the end of the of the add
portion of the cycle (2450 ). At this time clapper
reset and pinion "backup" again take place. At
the same time reset arms AE move downward to
allow hatchet Ab to limit in either number, nine
or carry position as determined by pinion rotation
during the add portion of the cycle.
X
z
w
AA
3,CARRY
Fig. IlI-44
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
Fig. III-45
If the amount on a pinion has not exceeded
eight (8) during the add portion of the cycle.
hatchet AS will be limited at point AC by ear
AD on carry latch Y. In this position the" A"
pads of the printed circuit board are bridged by
the carry wiper in this column.
For Form 3747
I
32
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
If, during the add portion of the cycle, the
pinion is rotated to nine, follower arm AG will
be located on the high point of carry cam I. Tip
AA of follower arm AG will be positioned forward (toward carry wiper W). As follower arm
AG rides up the incline of carry cam I, it will
contact lip V of release bail X, pivoting the release bail upward to release carry latch Y. As
the carry latch is released, lip AD on the tail of
the carry latch will be positioned forward to
align with the cutout in the lower side of hatchet
AB. At 2450 when hatched AB is allowed to drop,
lip AA on follower arm AG will limit the hatchet
as shown. In this position pads "C" and "E" are
bridged by carry wiper W.
y
'_7JJI'!II--e--_AA
Sec. III
AG is not held by carry cam I, lip AA will
return to its normal (0 to 8) position. At 2450 ,
when hatchet AB is allowed to drop, lip AD on
carry latch Y will limit the hatchet on the step
as shown. In this position, pads "B" and "C"
will be bridged by carry wiper W.
Reset arms AE are actuated from three sets
of double cams AK on the product accumulator
cam shaft, through arms AJ and rollers AI assisted
by springs AH. As can be seen from the product
accumulator timing chatt in Section VII, carry
reset begins at approximately 3450 of the previous cycle and is completed by 550 of the
current cycle. From 550 to 2450 , reset arms
AE are in pre-carry position. It is during this
time that the carry wiper position is indexed by
releasing carry latch Y and positioning cam
follower AG. Hatchet AB is prevented from dropping by reset arms AE. From 2450 to 3450 reset
arms AE move downward allowing hatchets to
seek their limit as determined by the positioning
of carry latches Y and cam followers AG. It
will be noted that carry latch Y cannot be reset
behind latch bail X if the pinion is in nine position during carry reset.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Fig. III-46
When an amount greater than nine 1S accumu1ated during the add portion of the cycle, follower
arm AG will ride over the high point of carry cam
I, releasing carry latch Y as before to position
lip AD forward to align with the cutout in the
lower side of hatchet AB. Since follower arm
x
y
A36-1 (a) Cam follower arms AG must be free
with no more than. 003" side play between
the "U" forms of latch bails X.
(b) Latch bails X must be free with no more
than.003" side play and with the play of
the pinion shaft taken up to the right or left,
follower arms AG should have no less than
2/3 hold on cams I.
To Adjust: (a) Weave the "U" form of follower arms AG as required.
(b) Reposition retaining set collars as required.
Reason: To ensure freedom of latch bails X
and follower arms A G and to maintain alignment of follower arms A G with carry cams
1.
Fig. III-47
AD
A36-3 Hatchets AB must be free in their guide
comb, have a full hold on lip AA of follower
arm AG and lip AD of carry latch Y.
To Adjust, reposition retaining set collars for
hatchets AB as required.
Reason: To ensure free movement of hatchets
AB and alignment with component parts.
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Inst.\'Uction Book
v
33
x
I
Fig. III-48
A36-4 Carry latches Y must be free in their gUide
comb, have side clearance with follower arms
AG and should have no more than. 010" side
play.
To Adjust, reposition retaining set collars for
latches Y .as required.
Reason: To ensure free movement of carry
latches Y.
A36-11 With springs AH unhooked from reset
arms AE a..nd a *6 roller on the top stud of
arms AJ (3 places), cycle the product accumulator to between 20 and 30 degrees. There
should be clearance, not to exceed. 008", between the bottom rollers AI and cam AK, when
the top roller AI is limiting against cam AK.
To Adjust, select the correct roller (*1 through
*5) for bottom roller AI.
Printed in U. S. America
12-1-62
Reason: To ensure free rotation of the carry
reset shaft.
A36-12 With follower arms AG on the high point
of carry Cam I, there should be .020" to .025"
releasing clearance between carry latch Y and
la tch bail X.
To Adjust, weave formed ear V on latch bail
X as required.
Reason: To ensure releasing carry latches Y.
A36-13 With carry reset arms AE at thcrir extreme
upward position (approximat ely 30 ), there
should be .025" to .030" reseting clearance
between carry latches Y and latch bails X.
To Adjust, turn eccentric screws AL as required.
Reason: To ensure resetting carries without
driving hatchets AB out of their guide comb.
For Form 3747
34
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
ROUNDING-OFF AND CLEARING
It is often necessary to round-off products to
the nearest cent, dime, dollar, or ten dollars.
This is controlled through control panel programming and is accomplished during the right hand
accumulator cycle in shifter position 21, by adding five to the product accumulator column corresponding to keyboard column zero, one, two,
or three. If the amount on the selected pinion is
five or more, a carry into the left adjacent accumulator column will result.
For greater accuracy of products, eight of
the twenty accumulator pinions are located to the
right of the first add rack. Since there is no mechanical shift, these pinions cannot be cleared
of amounts by the add racks and consequently
have no gears to mesh with add racks. Clearing
is accomplished by latching in the total bail,
which performs the same function as the total
bail of a basic mechanical accumulator, and
turning the pinions through the accumulator
drive until their total lobes limit on the underside of the total bail.
During the left hand accumulator cycle in
shifter position 21, prior to transferring the product, the accumulator colUmn to which the five
had been added during round -off and all columns
to its right are cleared. This "clear" accumulator cycle is identical to an add cycle except that
the total bail is latched in and the only pulse re-
Sec. III
celVed by the pinion solenoids is the "nine"
pulse from S209. Thls "nine" pulse is gated to
the accumulator columns designated to be cleared by control panel programming. When a designated solenoid is receiving its "nine" pulse and
tJ:ie total bail is latched in, the corresponding pinion rotates with the pinion drive shaft until its total lobe limits on the total bail. At this point,
the pinion clutch slips as the drive shaft conti~'7
ues to turn.
Through control panel programming, both
rounding -off and clearing or rounding -off only
may be prevented. This is accomplished by
disabling the electrical circuits for the round -off
and/or clear pulses which would ordinarily reach
the pinion solenoids. Disabling of both roundingoff and clearing is known as proJ.:ating. However,
the "round-off' and "clear" accumulator cycles
as previously described are always required.
During a normal add accumulator cycle the
total bail is ultimately retained in inactive pOSition by total bail solenoid clapper AM The clapper retains bail AN which is urged against the
clapper by spring AV •
Initial indexing of the total bail mechanism
occurs at approximately 900·~f the "round-off"
accumulator cycle when total bail solenoid BD
(L235) is energized to pull in and hold clapper
AM out of the path of bail AN. Spring AV urges
bail AN to limit its roller AU against cam AW of
the accumulator camshaft assembly.
AN
AO
AW
Fig. III-49
AV
AU
Sec. III
35
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Early in the next accumulator cycle, which
is the "clear" cycle, bail AN follows cam A Wand
contacts ear AQ of latch bail AX to rock bail AX
clear of bail AY. Roller BA of bail AR follows
cam AZ, urged by spring AS. Bail AR rocks bail
A Y through stud AP in bail AR and the slot in bail
AY. Stud BB in bail A Y contacts arm AO, which
is pinned to the total bail shaft, rocking total bail
AT into active position. Movement of the total
bail is limited when arms AO and BH contact eccentric posts BE and BI, respectively, in the accumulator sideframes. Bail AN is reset at ap'0
proximately~5: of the clear cycle.
With the accumulator normal, the rollers of
two total bail latches BI. one of which is shown,
are urged against cams BG of the accumulator
camshaft by springs BF. In this position the
latches are held clear of latching arms BK of
total bail assembly AT, and arms BN of the total
bail assembly rest against bumpers BM on transfer
shaft BL to establish the normal position of the
total bail. For simplicity, only one arm BN and
bumper BM are shown in the illustration.
At approximately 250 of the accumulator
cycle, cams BG permit the springs to rock the
latches against the lower ends of the latching
arms. If the total bail has not been brought into
active position, the latches merely contact the
flat surface at the ends of the latching arms. If,
however, the total bail is in active position, the
latches contact the latching arms behind the
latching step and retain the total bail. The total
bail is latched in to prevent camming of the bail
by the total lobes.
The total bail is restored latei:r the accumu1ator cycle. At approximately 350 , the total
bail latches BI, driven by cams BG, release the
total bail. Bail AR is restored by its cam at approximately the same time, restoring the total
bail through spring Be.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A36-10 With total bail solenoid clapper AM
manually picked to release arm AN and the
product accumulator manually cycled until
the total bail assembly is limiting on the two
cam operated latches BI, there should be
equal clearance of .010" to .015" between
overthrow arms AO or BH and their respective
eccentric limit posts BE or BI.
To Adjust, turn eccentric post BE or BI as
required.
Reason: To ensure latching the total bail.
A36-8 With clapper AM of solenoid BD held
against its core, there should be .010" to
. 020" releasing clearance between clapper "AM
and arm AN.
To Adjust, move solenoid bracket as required.
Reason: To ensure releasing arm AN with minimum air gap.
A36-9 With clapper AM limiting against its retainer: clapper AM should have a flush hold on
arm AN.
To adjust, weave the retainer for clapper AM.
Reason: To ensure latching arm AN with minimum air gap.
BE
Fig. III-50
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
BI
For Form 3747
I
36
Burroughs, - Series F2000 Instruction Book
TRANSFERRING THE PRODUCT
Transferring the product is, in effect, totaling the product accumulator. This transferring,
or totaling, is indexed during the multiplication
routine and occurs during the sensimatic opera-
Sec. III
clapper CC to release bail CD. Releasing bail
CD allows spring BX to pivot bellcrank BS and
lower transfer link BZ. Lowering link BZ will
position the pocket in link BZ over screw post CA
in drive arm BR. Projection CE on bail CD indexes the index strip blocking bail.
dO
Fig. III-51
CB
tion following multiplication and in the same
stop position. Only the amounts in columns
which mesh with add rack extensions can be
transferred. The product thus obtained can be
non -added, added or subtracted in either or all of
the basic mechanical accumulators or indexed
into the" D" sect ion by control panel programming. The product accumulator cannot be Subtotaled.
The transfer operation is initiated during the
last (clear) cycle of the product accumulator,
when solenoid CB (L233) is pulsed to attract
Early in the sensimatic cycle, cam assembly
BP on the sensimatic camshaft rocks drive arm
BR through roller BQ, to pull transfer link BZ forward. Arm BW and link BV follow transfer link
BZ forward through broken joint spring BX. Link
BV through arm CQ rotates transfer. shaft CP. Enclosed cams CI,which are pinned to transfer
shaft CP, raise product accumulator pinion assembly CN into mesh with the add rack extensions. Rotation of the first eight pinions during
transfer operations is prevented by the ears on
bails CJ.
eN
Fig. III-52
BV
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
As enclosed cams Cl pivot to raise the pinion assembly, studs CT and CO contact bails CS
and CL, of the total bail shaft assembly, to rock
the total bail through springs CM and CU into
position to limit the total lobe of the pinions on
the top side of the total bail. As during the clear
operation, it is necessary to latch the total bail
in active position. However, since the product
accumulator is not cycled, this cannot be accomplished by latches BJ. For this reason, two
additional latches BJ -1 are provided. At normal
these latches are held inactive by two pins CR
located in transfer shaft CPo As the transfer shaft
is rotated at the beginning of the transfer operation, pins CR move away from latches BJ -1 to
allow the latches to lock the total bail in active
position. Movement of the total bail toward the
pinions is limited as before by arms AO and BH
contacting eccentric posts BE and Bl.
If the add racks were required to overcome
the friction clutches to turn the pinions, the load
would be so great that add rack latches would position in the lock plates before the total lobes
could limit on the total bail. To prevent this, an
auxiliary drive rack CW (helper rack) drives the
pinions at the same speed as the add racks thru a
link which in turn, connects to the left end of the
add rack control shaft. As the pinion assembly is
raised, the pinion drive gear G leaves its mating
gear H of the drive unit and meshes with auxiliary
drive rack CWo The pinions aye turned until
the~ total lobes limit on the top of the total bail,
limiting the movement of the add racks and causing the add rack latch studs to enter the lock
plates.
cv
Cy
G
Fig. III-53
H
At apprOXimately 170u of the machine cycle
drive arm BW is restored through roller BQ and
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
37
cam assembly BP, driving the transfer link rearward and restoring the transfer shaft assembly.
Release bail CD is relatched on clapper CC and
the forward end of link BZ is raised to clear screw
stud CA when roller BO contacts bellcrank CG.
As the transfer shaft assembly returns to normal,
pins CR again contact the total bail latches to release the total bail, which is then restored by
spring BC.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A23-1 With the machine normal, the flanged
roller on screw CA should be centrally located in the horizontal slot of link BZ.
To Adjust, with limit blank BT loosened to
prevent interference, reposition the bracket
for mesh control solenoid CB forward or
rearward as required.
REASON: To permit free movement of the
flanged roller in the horizontal slot of link
BZ during non-transfer operations.
A23-2 With clapper CC manually held against
the core of mesh control solenoid CB, there
should be passing clearance, not to exceed
.003", between latch arm CD and the surface of clapper CC.
To Adjust, reposition the bracket for mesh
control solenoid CB up or down as required.
REASON: To provide minimum air gap between clapper CC and the core of solenoid
CB.
A23 -3 With the machine cycled until arm CG
receives maximum throw from roller BO
o
0
(approximately 350 to 355 ), there should
be latching lead, not to exceed. 005" between latch arm CD and the front of the
window in clapper CC.
To Adjust, starting with the high side down,
turn eccentric CF as required.
REASON: To ensure latching transfer linkage
without excessive overthrow.
A23-4 a. With the machine normal, there should
be .010" to .015" clearance between the
rear of limit blank BT and the forward surface
of projection BY. b. With the machine
cycled until arm CG receives maximum throw
from roller BO, there should be .010" to .015"
clearance between the bottom of limit blank
BT and transfer link BZ. c. With clapper
CC manually bottomed and the machine
For Form 3747
I
38
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
cycled to position link BZ forward, there
should be passing clearance between projection BY and limit blank BT.
To Adjust, (a) reposition limit blank BT
forward or rearward. (b) and (c) reposition
limit blank BT up or down.
REASON: To ensure holding transfer link inactive during non-transfer operations and to
prevent interference between limit blank
BT and transfer link BZ.
A24-5 With the drive tripped and the sensimatic
cycled to approximately 70 0 , the rear surface
of gear G should just contact the front surface
of the tooth in drive rack CWo
To Adjust, rotate eccentric CX as required.
REASON: To ensure that the add racks will
not be required to turn the pinions during
a transfer operation.
A36-14 With the machine normal, two rollers
CH should not limit in the ends of enclosed
cams CI. With transfer solenoid clapper CC 0
manually actuated, cycle the machine to 100
( two rollers CH should be on the flat of enclosed cam CI). Total bail AT should be latched by latches BJ-1.
To adjust, turn eccentric BU as required.
Reason: To ensure latching total bail and to
ensure normalizing the pinion assembly and
total bail.
A36-16 The two (2) limit pins CR should have a
flush hold on latches BI -1.
To adjust, locate limit pins CR as required.
Reason: To ensure locking total limit bail AT
during a transfer operation.
A36-15 (a) Shaft CK should have. 002" to • O~S''
clearance between the left side frame and the
clips on the end of the shaft.
(b) There should be at least • 005" clearance
between ratchet retainer CJ and cams I.
(c) Cycle the product accumulator under power
to seat clappers I firmly against pinion ratchet
D. With the play of shaft CK held toward the
left side frame, there should be at least. 005"
clearance between retainers CI and clappers L
To Adjust, (a) add shims (X1-19) as required.
(b) weave ratchet retainers CI as
required
(c) recheck adjustments (a) and
(b) above
Reason: To maintain alignment of component
parts.
Sec. III
TWENTY-PLACE CLEAR
After prorating or after a power failure during a multiplication it is necessary to clear all
of the twenty accumulator pinions. This may be
done through control panel programming, or by
depression of the delta key with the carriage
controls disabled.
To initiate a twenty-place clear operation
it is necessary to trip the Sensimatic drive. This
is done by depressing the delta key in the case of
a manual clear or by programming a repeat for a
carriage controlled clear.
At 50 of the Sensimatic cycle, S222 of the
Sensimatic timing cam assembly closes. Voltage is applied to S222 through S248 for a manual
clear or through S215 for a programmed clear.
S222 energizes the keyboard stop solenoid, symbol slide stop solenoid, and the register designation stop solenoid, all of which are discussed in
detail under their own headings. Closing S222
also trips the accumulator clutch.
p
DB
Fig. III-54
Two accumulator cycles are required. As
in "round -off" and "clear", the total bail soleo
noid L235 is pulsed at 90 of the first cycle and
the total bail is actually latched in during the
second cycle. However, instead of gating
"nine" pulses to the pinion solenoids as during
"clear", a solenoid controlled mechanism is
provided to retain the clapper reset bail in its
clapper reset position to simulate the "nine"
pulses.
.
0
At approxlmately 7 of the second accumulator cycle the clapper bail solenoid (L234) is
energized to pull in clapper DB. As clapper reset
shaft P is rocked to reset the clappers, arm CZ
rocks arm DA through stud DE and arm DA clears
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
the end of clapper DB. As springs DF attempt to
restore the clapper reset bail, clapper DB blocks
arm DA and the reset bail, holding the pinion
clappers in reset position.
With the clappers held in this manner and
the total bail latched in, the pinion drive shaft
turns the pinions until their total lobes limit on
the underside of the total bail. The clapper reo
set solenoid is de -energized at 262 during the
second clapper reset movement (carry portion)
and clapper DB is permitted to drop out.
39
D
Fig. III-55
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A36-5 With clapper DB held against its core,
the clapper should have a flush hold on
arm DA.
To Adjust, reposition solenoid mounting
bracket as required.
Reason: To ensure latching the clapper reset shaft assembly without retarding clapper
drop out.
A36-6 With clapper DB limiting against limit
DC, there should be .045" to .050" passing clearance between clapper DB and arm
DA.
To Adjust. reposition limit DC as required.
Reason: To have normal air gap to prevent
pulling in clapper DB from hold voltage,
but to ensure pulling in with full VOltage.
KEYBOARD STOPS
When a manual or programmed twenty place
clear ~) is taken, the basic machine is cycled
for the sole purpose of obtaining a visual indication (. ODA) that we have performed this operation. In order to ensure that only the clear
sign prints from the keyboard, keyboard stop
solenoid G (1224) is energized to pull plunger A
forward, rocking fingers C down into the notches
of add rack extensions F and thereby limiting
the add racks at Cipher position. Plunger A and
fingers C are restored to normal by spring E.
To Adjust, loosen mounting screws and position guide brace D laterally as required.
Reason: To ensure a full hold of add rack
extensions F with the product accumulator
pinions.
A24-3 Plunger A should be free and when
manually bottomed there should be .010" to
• 030" clearance between the ends of fingers
C and bottom of the cutouts in add rack
extensions F.
To Adjust, reposition solenoid bracket B
as reqliired.
Reason: To retain add rack extensions F at
normal position.
A24-4 With the machine normal and plunger A
bottomed, there should be clearance, not
to exceed. 004", between fingers C and the
rear edge of the cut out in extensions F.
To Adjust, bend fingers C as required and
recheck A24-3.
[{eason: To ensure holding the add racks in
cipher position during a twenty place clear
operation and the release of fingers C at
the end of the operation.
Tests and Adjustments
A24-1 Add rack extensions F should be free and
the teeth of extensions F should align centrally with teeth of the product accumulator
pinions.
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
41
SIDE INSERTION CONTROL UNIT
The Side Insertion Control Unit is designed to
give rigid support to its 22" carriage construction
and the potential of greater programming flexibility.
It is an independently supported mechanism
which travels on ball bearings between the rear
carriage rail and a stationary third rail. The
carriage drive is furnished through a conventional
type gear box with spindles mounted on the back
plate, supported with ball bearings.
With the carriage in its right end position, the
panel is inserted from the right side, using a guide
channel to help locate the panel between the raceways. The panel will latch in position when the
ram lug on the end of the skip and return shaft
closes the jaws of the latch plate mechanism.
To remove the panel from the machine, return the carriage to the right end limit and position lever A rearward to release the latch plate
mechanism.
of the machine the front jaw must be manually
closed to release this lock. Before inserting the
panel the jaw must be re-opened to accept the
ram lug.
To change schedules the carriage must be in
the right end position and the job selector knob
pressed in and rotated to the desired schedule. The
knob will return to its detented position in any
schedule selected.
The only change in programming the lanes of
control is that lanes 61 thru 66 are used for functions formerly programme d in lanes 46 thru 51.
The following is a detailed description of the
mechanisms and adjustments.
CONTROL UNIT CONSTRUCTION
Structural Frame
The structural frame of the control unit is a
rigid casting with grooves milled along the front
and rear edges. These grooves are fitted with
selective race way shafts A to provide bearing
points for the ball bearings. Five different size
shafts are a vailab Ie, each increasing in diameter
by • 001", and are precision se lected at the factory
to provide control units of uniform width. The
size of the shafts can be determined by the number
of grooves cut in the recessed portion of the shafts.
-.----,;,'-,.;,'- - - - - -
CI/'-~'
A
Fig. III-57
Fig. III -56
As the panel is removed from the right side
of the machine the ram lug will open jaws P and
R which will actuate a lock to retain the carriage
in the right end position. If it is necessary to
move the carriage when the control unit is out
Printed in U. S. America
12-1-62
The No. 1 shaft is the smallest (.123") and will
have no grooves; No.2 shaft, one groove; No.3
shaft, two grooves; No. 4 shaft, three grooves; and
No.5 shaft, the largest (. 127") will have four
grooves. There should be no need to change the
size of these shafts after they h ave been selected
at the Factory, however, if an analysis of a problem proves this necessary always maintain equal
size shafts in anyone race way.
For Form 3747
I
42
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Fig. III-58
Adjustable Inserts
Twenty-eight adjustable inserts E are fitted to
the casting to adjust and anchor the stop, disk and
control pin assemblies. The insert is a hollow screw
which threads thru the casting and is locked in
place by lock nut B.
The stop, disk and control pin assemblies are
anchored to the adjustable inserts by flat head
screw F, lock washer D and round nut C. This
method of attachment permits vertical and some
lateral adjustment of these assemblies the full
length of the carriage. The inserts have been
adjusted at the factory to a pre -determined dimension and only minor vertical adjustment
should be necessary to obtain the correct relationship between the control pins or disks and sensing
tappets.
Adjustable Side Plates
Adjustable side plates AI are fastened to the
ends of the casting to give support and location to
the stop and disk shafts. Eccentric G is pre-set at
the factory to position the stop dogs and skip disks
in correct relationship with their respective latches.
Brace J is a support for the right side plate and
should be held against the side plate when screws
H are tightened.
To assemble or change stops or disks the
left side plate is removed by unpinning or disassembling necessary parts on left end of stop
and disk shaft, removing 2 mounting screws and
screw cap AJ.
When stops and disks have been assembled,
locate stop and disk shaft braces against front
and rear edges of support plate P and tighten securely. The side plate is reassembled using the
stop and disk shaft and eccentric G as locating
points. Reassemble screws and pins.
Stop and Disk Shaft Assembly
The stop and disk shafts are attached to
support plate P by braces Wand O. Six adjustable inserts are located above this assembly with
support plate P being anchored at 4 places.
Braces Wand 0 can be located at any point
on the support plate with the exception of the areas
around the four screws Q. When locating braces
on the shafts it is not necessary to allow room for
lateral movement of the stops and disks as the
braces move with these parts during schedule
changes.
T
Fig. III-59
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Job selector knob AG is attached to the disk
shaft through a pin and slot connection. To change
schedules the knob must be pressed in before rotating. which moves detent M thru shaft AD and plate
AE out of the path of blocks L and X on the stop
and disk shafts. When the schedule change has
been completed. spring AH restores knob AG to
normal and allows detent M to seat between blocks
Land X. Detent M is not only a means to hold
the stop and disk shafts in a stationary position but
is also adjustable to provide a parallel condition
between the disks and the skip and return latches
and sensing tappets. The end position release arms
for the latches have been removed from the carriage
side frames and this function will now be performed
by brackets AA and S mounted on the stop and
disk shafts.
The spiral worm gear K thru worm nut AC will
move the control unit pins 1/10" to the right or
left for each quarter turn of the job selector knob.
Worm nut AC is adjustable to align the control pins
with the sensing tappets.
43
NOTE: On early control units the front two
magazine trays are attached to the casting
with only 6 adjustable inserts. To stablize
the center section of the trays 8 allen
screws have been added to the casting.
After the trays have been adjusted for
height the allen screws should be screwed
down to the tray to keep it from tilting
during machine operation.
AJ
I
Fig. I11-60
Magazine Trays
The control pins and magazines for lanes 6
thru 25 and 31 thru 50 are contained in magazine
trays I. each of which is secured to the casting by
8 adjustable inserts. Four reference magazines
are required in each tray and they should be located
close to the adjustable inserts to ensure uniform
height of the pins with the tappets the full length
of the carriage.
The control pins and magazines for the electrical lanes 51 thru 66 are in a magazine tray
which is attached to the casting by 6 adjustable
inserts. Four magazines with ground pins are in
this tray as reference points for factory setting of
the magazine tray.
To reduce the side play of the electrical
magazines a notched scale has been placed in
the bottom of the tray. In addition to this the
electrical sensing pins have been shortened to
reduce the arc thru which the pin will travel when
the magazine moves from side to side. To compensate for the shorter pin the switch actuators
have been lengthened. The adjustment of the
lane switch assembly should be made in the same
manner and meet the same conditions as previous
1/10" machines.
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
AN
Support Rails for Control Unit
To support the control unit in the machine
the rear carriage rail, which is fixed to the machine side frames, has been modified to include a
groove, milled along its rear edge. A similar! y
grooved third rail located to the rear of the
machine is mounted on auxillary side frames
fastened to the base of the machine. Both rails
are fitted with raceway bearing shafts held in
place by the rail end caps. A bearing cage containing 12 ball bearings is attached to each rail to
provide free movement of the control unit between the two rails.
The third rail can be adjusted vertically thru
bracket AM and eccentric AN to obtain a parallel
condition of the control pins with the tappets. The
distance between the two rails is adjusted by set
screw A P to provide a free running unit without
sag.
Easy insertion of the control unit into the raceways has been obtained thru the use of a guide
channel AR which is fitted to the top of the casting.
The unit is inserted from the right side of the
machine by engaging the guide pins AS into the
grooved bar which is attached to the carriage, and
sliding the unit into position.
For Form 3747
44
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C10-3-35 Race way shafts must limit normally in
the race ways and be free to rotate.
To Adjust: Adjust retaining ears of spring
clips Z as required and secure with screws Y.
Reason: To help prevent wear of the race
wa y shafts and ensure retaining shafts in their
normal position.
C10-3-41 With the Schedule Selector knob positioned in schedule 4, there should be .034"
t.010" clearance between the right end of
the support plate P and the inside of the
right end plate.
To Adjust: With nut N loose and braces
loose on the disk and stop dog shafts, position
support plate P as required and tighten nut N.
Reason: To equalize overthrow of the
Schedule Selector knob in positions No. 1
and No.4.
C10-3-12 (a) With the Schedule Selector knob
moved inward and rotated a distance of approXimately 450 , the idler shaft detent M
should have passing clearance of .003" to
• 008" with the locking blocks Land X. In
the normal position detent M must not limit
against bracket AA.
(b) With detent M seated firmly between
locking blocks L and X the active surfaces of
the disks and stop dogs must be paralled with
support plate P.
To Adjust: (3) With the stop dog and disk
assembly in schedule No.4, move detent M
on shaft AD as required and tighten set screw
in detent M.
(b) Loosen screw AF and with selector knob
moved inward to disengage detent M from
locking blocks, align shafts as required. Release selector knob to engage detent between
locking blocks and tighten screw AF.
Reason: To ensure release and restoring of
the detent M and ensure that stops dogs are
in their nominal function position.
CIO-3-4 The stop dogs must align directly with
control pins.
To Adjust: Locate stop dogs as required.
Reason: To ensure correct alignment of
stop dogs with control pins.
C10-3-5 Set up disks must be aligned with control
pins, within!. 005" •
To Adjust: Position dis~ as required to align
with control pins.
Reason: To have set up disks in correct alignment with the stop dogs and control pins, with
control pins aligned over tappets and stop dogs
located between stop latches.
C10-3-2 There should be no less than three bearing braces to a maximum of five, spaced as
close as possible in equal increments along
the length of the stop shaft with no portion
of the shaft unsupported for a distance greater
than 7 inches. Bearing braces should be
placed alternately against the right and left
sides of stop dogs with clearance not to exceed
.003" between braces and stop dogs.
To Adjust: Place bearing braces as required.
Reason: To ensure uniform support to the
stop dog shaft and limit lateral movement of
stop dog assembly within Engineering specifications.
CIO-3-1 (a) There should be no less than three
and a maximum of five bearing braces, spaced as close as possible in equal increments
along the length of the disk shaft with no
portion of the shaft unsupported for a distance
greater than 7 inches.
(b) Bearing braces should be placed alternately against the right and left sides of the disks
with clearance not to exceed. 003" between
braces and disks.
To Adjust: Position bearing braces on support
plate as required.
Reason: (a) To ensure uniform support of the
disk shaft. (b) To limit the lateral movement of the disk shaft.
CIO-3-14 (a) The third rail must be in correct
vertical alignment with the fixed rear carriage
rail. (b) The control unit must move freely
between the rails with .001" to .003" side
movement between the bearings and the race
way shafts.
NOTE: These adjustments have been made at
the factory with a special height and
level gauge. Do not disturb the third
rail setting unless analysiS of a problem
indicates that this is necessary.
To Adjust: (a) With the third rail held
securely by screws AK and a straight edge
held against bottom of the two carriage rails
and the third rail, turn eccentric AN until
vertical alignment of the three rails is obtained. Tighten nuts for screws AN and AL to
Sec. III
45
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
(b) The height of the stop dogs should be
relative to the height of the control pins as
per Kit 427-1.
To Adjust: (a) Loosen nuts C and lock nuts B
in the area that is being adjusted and turn
adjustable limit inserts E as required to raise or
lower magazine tray. Tighten lock nuts B.
Snug all nuts, C. (b) Place Kit 427-1 in
magazine tray and turn adjustable limit inserts E in stop dog assembly as required.
NOTE: When the above Test and Adjustment
is completed; loosen nuts C (one at
a time) in front magazine channel
and in the stop dog assembly; apply
loctite to nut C and retighten nut.
Reason: To ensure correct operating clearance of control pins with tappets, and stop
dog and disk assembly with related components.
Fig. III -61
C10-3-10 There should be .047" to .053" clearC10-3-15 With the guiding portion of the pilot
ance between the tappets in lanes No. 32 and
track AR on the program unit engaged in the
the four reference magazines.
guide bar on the carriage, the rails of the
To Adjust: Loosen nuts C and lock nuts B in
program unit must be in correct vertical alignthe area that is being adjusted and turn adment with the fixed carriage rail and the third
justable limit inserts E as required for correct
rail.
clearance.
To Adjust: With right carriage side frame set
NOTE: When the above Test and Adjustment
fer maximum height thru eccentric on right
is completed, loosen nuts C in center
end of center rail, turn eccentrics in brackets
magazine tray one at a time, and
for guide bar as required.
apply Loctite to nut C and retighten
Reason: For easy insertion of program unit innut and lock nut B.
to rails.
Reason: To ensure correct operating clearC10-3-27 With worm sleeve AC located to center
ance of control pins in relation to tappets.
the
clamp
screws
in
their
elongated
slots,
inCI0-3-31
With the carriage in the extreme right
'f
stall program unit in carriage and manually
or left positions, the limit detents Sand AA
hold carriage in the tab direction. (a) Stop
must limit and hold the carriage, and must
dogs should align centrally between stop
depress the latches sufficiently to release the
latches. (b) Contro1.pins must be in correct
paddles.
lateral location over tappets.
To Adjust: Re-check Test and Adjustment,
To Adjust: (a) Turn eccentric on escapement
Code CI0-3-9.
assembly as required. (b) Loosen the three
Reason: To ensure release of indexed latches.
clamp screws AB and turn worm sleeve AC
CI0-3 -13 The support arms from the chassis must
as required and tighten screws.
provide rigid support to the rear auxiliary side
Reason: (a) To establish the correct relationframes.
To Adjust: (With computer section removed)
ship between stop dogs and latches and ensure
turn eccentrics as required to align holes in
release of spear point interlock. (b) To align
support arms with holes in auxiliary side
control pins with tappets while maintaining
conditions in adjustment (a).
frames.
C10-3-9 (a) There should be .047" to .053" clearReason: To prevent distortion of the chassis
ance between the tappets in lanes No.6 and
and the setting of the third rail by the weight
No. 21 and the four reference magazines
of the computer section.
located as near to the adjustable inserts as
NOTE: Do not disconnect support arms
possible.
with computer section in the machine.
hold bracket AM in place. Repeat for other
side of machine. (b) With carriage in right
end position and screw A K snug exert pressure
against third rail to firmly hold the ball bearings against the raceway rods. Turn screw AP
in or out to provide. 001" to .003" clearance
between screw A P and the rear surface of the
third rail. Tighten screws AK and AQ. Repeat adjustment with carriage in left end
position.
Reason: To provide a free running carriage
with minimum play between the raceways.
'I
I
X
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
.
~
X/dv-CI
! 0 'lb. j) ___ --r=~;::t
O·Ci 0.· )-"/ /
For Form 3747
( C. /c) .>.;'>' /
c: lo·}-t o
46
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. III
A
Fig. III-62
LA TCH PLA TE ASSEMBL Y
The latch plate mechanism, attached to the
outside of the left carriage side frame, provides
the means of coupling the control unit to the
carriage. This coupling action is performed by
toggle jaws P and R closing around the ram lug on
the left end of the disk shaft. To prevent disengagement of toggle jaws during carriage movement,
wedge slide G is positioned by spring H between
the toggle jaws causing them to be locked in the
closed position when the carriage is out of the right
end position. Rotation of the job selector knob is
prevented when the lower cut-out in slide M is
seated around the projections on the ram lug. To
change schedules the carriage is moved to its
extreme right position where arm V is raised when
the nylon skid on the rear carriage rail contacts
welded tab T. Arm V pivoting at stud L, contacts
the forward lip of arm I and pivots the curved end
downward against eccentric K. This action pivots
link J around stud L to raise lock slide M, thru stud
N, clear of the projections on the ram lug. Aslock
slide M is raised, it contacts eccentric collar F to
raise wedge slide G slightly to release the pressure
of spring H on toggle jaws Rand P.
The raising of arm V by the nylon skid also
rocks arm W, thru spring S to swing the upper projection of bellcrank X out of the path of stud D on
release lever A • This will allow arm A to be
positioned rearward to initiate removal of the
control unit. When release lever A is manually
moved rearward the comming action of stud D
against arm E raises wedge slide G from between
toggle jaws P and R. Release lever A is retained
in its rearward position by the spring tension on
wedge slide G holding arm E in a deten ting position for stud D.
When the control unit is removed from machine,
jaws P and R pivot open and are held in this position
by the toggle action of springs Q. As jaw P opens,
its button stud cams wedge slide G further upward
releasing its pressure on arm E. This allows release
arm A to return to its forward position thru spring
C.
When the control unit is re-inserted into the
machine, the ram lug contacts the rear portion of
jaws P and R causing them to close around the ram
lug. As the button stud on jaw P moves out of the
path of wedge slide G the slide is moved to its
locking position between the toggle jaws.
Carriage Lock
The purpose of the carriage lock is to retain
the carriage in its extreme right end position when
the control unit is being installed or until a schedule
change has been completed. With the carriage in
its extreme right position and release lever A moved
rearward to its detented position, arm E thru link
Y, lifts arm Z away from stud AA in blocking arm
AC. Spring AB will cause arm ACto pivot intofa
Sec. III
Burroughs - Series F2000 InstructIOn Book
47
y
\
\
I
I
\
Fig. III -63
slot in the front side of the rear carriage rail,
locking the carriage in the end position.
To prevent release of the lock when the control unit is removed and release lever A is restored
to normal, jaw R contacts the lower lip on arm Z
to maintain arm Z in its actuated position. When
the control unit is re-inserted the ram lug closes
jaw R into its coupling position thereby releasing
the carriage lock. With the carriage in the extreme right position and the job selector knob
partially rotated the square block on the left end
of the stop shaft, contacts the vertical lip on arm
Z to pivot arm Z away from stud AA. Spring AB
moves arm AC into the slot of the rear carriage
rail locking the carriage in the end position until
the stop and disk shafts are detented squarely.
End Position Limit Post
The end position limit post is located on the
inside of the left carriage side frame and will
establish the extreme right position of the carriage.
It is adjusted to ensure that the carriage lock is
aligned with the cut out iIl.,.the carriage rail.
TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
C10-3-20 With the program unit inserted into
carriage, the ram lug must be centrally
located between the toggle jaws P and R.,
To Adjust: With 4 mounting screws B that
secure the latch plate to the carriage loose,
Printed in U,S. America 12-1-62
position latch plate assembly as required and
tighten screws.
Reason: To establish the normal position of
the latch plate assembly prior to the following
adjustments.
NOTE: After making above adjustments, move
carriage to the extreme right poSition,
and check schedule selector knob to
turn freely to each schedule.
C10-3-21 With carriage in the extreme right position the welded tab T on interlock actuator,
V must be centered in the cut-out in the top
of the nylon skid on the fixed carriage rail.
To Adjust: Loosen screws and align nylon
skid as required and tighten screws.
Reason: To enable latch M to be raised,
allowing a change of schedule.
C10-3-22 The welded tab T on interlock actuator
V must clear the fixed carriage rail by .010"
to. 020".
To Adjust: Turn eccentric guide post a for
required clearance. (Interlock actuator must
have clearance at bottom of comb U).
Reason: To prevent damage to interlock when
traveling over rail.
CI0-3-24 With carriage in the extreme right
position, lock slide M must be cammed upward to clear tooth on ram lug by at least
.025" .
To Adjust: Turn eccentric screw K as required.
Reason: To allow operator to select schedules.
For Form 3747
I
48
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
CIO-3-26 With the carriage in the extreme right
position and release lever A indexed rearward, wedge slide G should be raised to clear
toggle jaws P and R.
To Adjust: Parts specifications should provide
this condition.
Reason: To allow removal of program unit.
CIO-3-23 With the toggle jaws P and R held in
the latched position by the ram lug, the wedge
slide G should be centrally located in abe cut
out steps of the toggle jaws.
To Adjust: Loosen nut and locate eccentric
guide post 0 laterally as required, keeping
the high side of the eccentric positioned as
per previous test, and tighten nut.
Reason: To enable easy indexing of program
unit release lever and ensure locking of the
toggle jaws when program unit is inserted into carriage.
CIO-3-45 With the carriage in the extreme right
hand position. wedge slide G should be raised,
as lock slide M is cammed upward. to allow
free rotation of job selector knob.
To Adjust: While rotating the job selector
knob, turn eccentric collar F as required for
free rotation.
Reason: To ensure easy seleCtion of program
schedules by relieving the pressure of wedge
slide G on toggle jaws Rand P.
CIO-3-39 With the carriage in the extreme right
hand position, the escapement pawls should
engage tooth space of ratchet with .005" to
. 020" passing clearance.
To Adjust: Add or remove shims on the end
position limit post as required.
NOTE: If latch plate assembly is removed
recheck Test, Code CIO-3-20.
Reason: To ensure engagement of escapement
pawls when the carriage is in the extreme
right hand position.
CIO-3-25 With the carriage in the extreme right
position, and the program unit release lever
A indexed to the rear, the upward movement
of the stud in actuating arm E should cause
link Y to set up the initial locking of the
carriage, by moving carriage lock AC into
the slot of the fixed caqj.age rail.
To Adjust: Parts specifications should provide this condition.
Reason: To ensure the carriage being locked
before removal of the program unit.
Sec, III
CIO-3-36 (a) With the control unit latched in the
carriage, and the carriage in the extreme
right position, interlock AC should clear the
fixed rail by .030" to .075", and with the
stop dog shaft rotated approximately 7", interlock AC must locate in the slot of the fixed
rail to lock the carriage. (b) With carriage
interlock located in the slot of the fixed rail,
there should be at least. 020" clearance between the leading edge of the interlock and
the edge of the slot in rail.
To Adjust: (a) Weave actuating arm Z as
required. Make certain the ear of arm Z has
full vertical surface contact with the square
block on the end of the stop shaft. (b) Parts
specifications should provide this condition.
Reason: To ensure interlock clearing the
fixed rail with carriage in an operating position, and locking the carriage when stop
dog shaft is out of normal position, or when
program unit is removed.
CIO-3-28 With the carriage in the extreme right
position, index the program unit release lever
A to the rear. Removal of the program unit
should cause the toggle jaw to retain carriage
lock AC in the slot of the fixed carriage rail.
To Adjust: Bend formed ear of actuating arm
Z as required.
Reason: To retain carriage in a locked position until the stop dog and disk shafts are in
their square detented positions.
CIO-3-29 With the carriage in an operating position, program unit release lever A must be
latched in its forward position by interlock
X.
To Adjust: Recheck Test and Adjustment
Code CIO -3 -22.
Reason: To prevent indexing the release
lever and raising wedge slide G which would
allow program unit to be removed in a position where damage might result to control
pins and tappets.
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section V
I
•
FEATURES
Printed in U.S.America 12-1-62
For form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section V
3
MULTIPLE FACTOR STORAGE
Multiple factor storage is an optional feature of F2000 machines with 1/10" tabulation. It
greatly increases the storage capacity of the machine by permitting the multiplicand storage unit
to be "split" electrically and only certain sequential columns of the multiplicand to be "read"
through control panel programming.
Indexing of the multiplicand is accomplished in the same manner as with other machines:
However, two or three multiplicand factors may
be indexed simultaneously if the multiplicand is
later "split" through the multiple factor controls.
This, of course, results in considerable saving of
time.
The multiple factor components are arranged in a single unit mounted inside the door of
the machine stand. The functional components
include four relays, nine diodes and two five-position switches. For reference, the wiring diagram
deSignations of the relays are K206 through K209,
the diodes CR210 through CR218, and the switches
S281 and S282.
Utilization of multiple factor storage is begun by manually positioning rotary switches S281
and S282. The switches may be set to divide the
multiplicand storage unit into either two or three
parts. With the switches set as shown in Figure
V -I, for example, the splits are between Columns
4 and 5, and between Columns 8 and 9. This
divides the multiplicand data into three parts.
Fig. V-I
Multiple factor split-active relay K206 is
normally picked in the same carriage position as
pre-multiply relay K201. To accomplish this a
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
1 pin is used in Lane 41 (on machines without the
adjustable mechanism in Lane 41 it is necessary
to use a "lA" pin which is copper plated for
identification). The sensing of the I (or" lA")
pin causes not only the multiply relay (K201) but
also the split-active relay (K206) to be picked.
K206 is held through a 10K resistor and a set of
its own normally open contacts from S207-C (same
as K201). K206 is also picked when a "3" pin
(Negative-Multiply) is used in Lane 41. Since it
ma y not be desirable to have split -factors every
time Negative Multiply is set up with a "3" pin,
K206 can be dropped in the next carriage position
by the use of an electrical pin in Lane 47 (DPM)
which breaks the hold circuit to K206.
During the pre -shift portion of the multiply
routine, two of the three matrix relays, K207
through K209, are picked. Which two depends
upon which decimal shift is being used. As shown
in the diagram in Figure V -2, the B+ from the
selected pad of S264 (Lane 44 - Decimal Shift) is
applied to the diode matrix on TB203. These
diodes gate the B+ to the proper relays. The
ground circuit for the matrix relays contains a set
of normally open contacts of K206.
With K206 picked in a multiply position, a
shift of 2 will cause energizing of matrix relays
K208 and K209, a shift of 5 will cause energizing
of K207 and K209, and a shift of 8 will cause energizing of K207 and K208. A shift of 7 is not designed to permit a multiplicand split but will cause
all of the data in the multiplicand storage unit to be
utilized. This is because the 7 shift would be more
difficult to program due to a decimal point consideration.
Only normally closed contacts of the matrix
relays are used. These contacts have been inserted
in the column common lines of the multiplicand
storage unit. Therefore, picking a matrix relay
causes its contacts to open and, in effect, disconnect certain columns of the multiplicand storage
unit. This gives an indication of zero in the affected columns.
The diagram in Figure V-I shows the interrelationship between the rotary switches and the
matrix relays. It should be noted that switch settings have no effect on columns 9, 10, 11 and 12.
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
4
Section V
Since the hold circuit for K206 gets its B+
from the same point as the hold circuit for K201,
the same means used to drop K201 will also drop
Back voltages from S277 (Right Hand Shifter
Position Selector) are blocked by diodes CR210,
CR211 and CR212. Without these diodes matrix
relays would be momentarily picked and dropped
as S277 is moved to different positions. This
would cause loss of various parts of the multiplicand during the multiplication routine and would
result, of course, in wrong products.
K206.
Dropping of K206 causes any matrix relays
previously picked also to drop because a set of
normally open contacts of K206 are in their
ground circuit.
TO T8204-5
S207
~
-9
22
K206
1/1
,
I ..
Iii
21
,00
I'"
4
R233
10K 2W
XI
A
,I
COL. I
A
7/1
X2
,
,,
,
,
,
COL. 2
23
4
I
K208
24
,/1
,,
COL. 3
I.,
e
t~
6
I"'
J
7"
COL. 4
D
,
22
1/1
I
COL. 5
E ~
..
'e
'N
0
..g:
i!E
'.
S264
LANE 44
IN
I"
24
CR212
CR211
,...
-'
)
7/ ,
CR210
F
..
(5
00
COL. 6
,
F
I
I
26
1/1
,
,,
'.
'N
,.
,N
COL.7
r-~
,i
,.
TB203
CR213--CR214 c-2"iS--C-RZi6- CR211-CR2IS"--l
1~~....*4,;3~~4~H>;-5~-6:-l<111~7
28
,
7./
:
L___________________________ J
.)
COL.IO
L)
COL. II
M)
COL.12
N)
Fig. V-2
o
Z
COL.8
COL.9
XI
2:l
/
8
21
21 i.20e
24
•
26
•
28
•
23
'K20.
*
*
25
K209
27
K20e
~K
~L
~M
~N
5
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section V
MULTIPLE FACTOR RELAY AND SWITCH ASSEMBLY
J201
8
28
71----+_--427
6
26
- 25
5
4
24
3
2
-23
2
I
- 21
K207, K208, K209
o
o
0
CR211 CR210
CR212
I
TB203
26}NOT
1 -_ _
-~25 USED
24
- 23
-
22
21
0
EJD~CR217 0
CR216 0
~D~CR215 0
~ a:: CR214 0
CR218
8D rJ
&oCR213
K207
a::
0
7
6
3
2
1
EJCJ
R233
Fig. V-3
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
6
MULTIPLE FACTOR SWITCH
''II
- S281 and/or S282
.f
II
SECTION
8
9
rn
Fig. Y-4
Section Y
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section VI
•
I
SERVICING PROCEDURES
Printed ill
u. s.
America
Revised 7 -1-63
For Form 37'17
2
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section VI
lNDEX
SERVICLNGm,OCEPURES
PAGE NO.
Preventative Maintenance Guide .... " ..
'!' .............. .. " ............
~
...................... " ""
Removal and Replacement Proc.edures "................. • e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ ........
\'I . . . . . "
,II . . . . . . . . . . .
II)
•
•
. . . . . . II, "
.. ..
•
..
..
3
7
Sec. VI
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruct:tonffObi{
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE GUIDE
The following is an outline. of the procedure to :follow on a Prave.ntiva
Maintenance Attention to a Series F2000 Machine.
A.
INITIAL PROCEDURE:
Prior to any mechanical work, perform the following steps;
1.
Inquire of the operator of anyconditionsthat.he (or she) has
noticed that require correctiono
2.
Determine from the operator if there are any stored factors, or
totals in the machine. When P.M. is completed, make sure that
they are re-entered correctly.
3 •. Make operating tests of the machine.
Use all keys, operator
control keys, motor bars, etc. Note any peculiarities of
operation with respect to machine speed, unusual sounds,
printing, carriage movement, accumulation, etc.
B.
APPROVED LUBRICANTS AND CLEANING AGENTS:
The lubricants and cleaning agents used in this product are listed
here, and apply in general as stated. Special lubrication
instructions will be found under the "Specific Instructions" part
of t his guide.
1.
Machine Oil S13lA - to be used on all shaft bearings, pivot
points, rollers, oil holes, and metal to metal contact of
moving parts.
2.
Grease S167tA - to be used on the periphery of all cams, forked
arms, and slots where contact is made wi th studs, all metal
gears, and metal to metal contact of moving parts where oil will
not suffice.
.
. 3 •. GreaseSl73 Texaco Uni temp. - to be used on the plastic or
nylon actuators of all switches, and in placeofS167iA grease
wherever there is a,danger of grease thinning out and dropping
onto electrical components.
40
Cleaning Agents :
Polish (811).
NorE:
Platen Restorer (S3) and Case Cleaner and
Care should alwaysbe taken when lubricating mechanisms
where an ex.cess of lubricant may get onto electrical
components and cause a tn:l.lfunctiono·
Printed in U. S. America Revised 8-1-61
For Form J747
Burroughs - SeriesF2000 InstructiouBook
C.
Sec. VI
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
The inspection should be performed systematically, and cover all
sections of the machine. Special attention should .be given to
areas where experience has indicated that trouble may exist.
1.
Each section should be properly cleaned of all dust, old
and foreign matter, and properly lubricated.
2.
All Wrts and mechanisms should operate freeJ,.y, without
interference from adjacent parts, and perform according to
tests and adjustments. Make necessary corrections to meet
these conditions.
grease~
3. All sections should be inspected for· worn, broken, or defective
parts. Replace any found to be faulty,
etc. should be detected and tightened.
D.
All loose nuts, screws
4.
All wiring should be checked to be in good condition and to be
clear of moving parts. All taper tabs and other connections
should be tight. Correct when necessary.
5.
Correction Index improvements should be installed to maintain the
machine in the best condition.
SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS I
The Basic Sensimatic and FIOOO Preventive Maintenance Guides are to
be used for that portion of the F2000 to which they apply. Listed
here are sections in addition to the Basic Machine, and the Servicing
procedures to follow.
1.
Component Unit:
a.
Apply general instructions.
b.
On new machines the Printed circuit discs should be cleaned
with platen restorer and a cotton swab or soft· olean cloth
during the routine shop check out procedure. They should be
cleaned again in three months. Thereafter, the. normal
servicing requirement. should be followed.
c.
Check adjustments of clutches, discs, and switches.
d.
Lubricate section sparingly with machine oil and Sl73 gre(1se.
NOTE.
2.
Nylon gears do not require lubrication.
Product Accumulator:
a.
Apply general instructions.
Sec. VI
3.
4.
5
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instru.ction Book
b.
The carry printed circuit board should be checked and
cleaned any time that a section is serviced for other
reasons, or as often as individual conditions warrant.
Co
Nylon clutch bands and drums should be cleaned of all dirt
and foreign matter to perform properly. Lubricating these
parts is not necessary.
do
Lubricate section with machine oil and
S17~
grease.
Multiplier Drive Unit:
a.
Apply general instructions.
b.
Check pulse generator contacts.
c.
Lubricate with machine· oil (note oil holes) and S167~
grease. Use S173 grease on timing cam switch actuators.
Operand Storage Unit (D Section):
a.
Apply general
b.
Check printed circuit boards; clean whenever foreign
matter has accumulated.
c.
Lubricate with machine oil and S167~A grease.
instI~ctions.
5. Auxiliary Sensing Unit:
6.
a.
Apply general instructions.
b.
Check printed circuit switches 'and clean when foreign
matter accumulates.
c.
Lubricate switch actuators with S173 grease; elsewhere with
machine oil and S167~A grease as prescribed.
Power Section:
a.
Apply general instructions.
b.
Check motor overload clutch adjustment.
c.
Lubricate with machine oil, Sl~7~A grease, and S173 grease
on Sensimatic timing cam switch actuators.
NOTE:
If adjustments, other than adjustments contained in Series
!<'25-f50o Instruction Book, !<'orm 3740, and Series F2000
Printed in U. S. America Revised 8-1-61
6
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction.Book
•
Sec. VI
Instruction Book, Form 3747, are necessary to maintain a
satisfactory level of operation of th~ system, a complete
report describing the need for such adjustment must be made
to the Accounting Machine Products Group, Home Office.
After the completion of inspection, have operator test machine
while preparing Service Reports.
Section VI
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
7
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ffiOCEDURES
E
A
G
Figure 1
Removal of Multiply Unit
NOTE: Right and left directions are given
facing the rear of the machine.
1. Remove printed circuit boardK.
2. Disconnect pin connectors M and J on
bottom of the component unit.
3. Disconnect pin connector G on bottom of
the product accumulator unit.
4. Remove the two screws B that hold the
brace for the shaft across the top of the
product accumulator. Care should be
taken to prevent dropping the nuts or
lockwashers into the product accumulator;
5. Remove the clip N from the stud on the
transfer link and separate the parts.
6. Remove the three screws Gthat hold the
computer timing cam switches, and the
belt from the pulley.
Printed in U. S.America Revised 7-1-63
7. Remove the two wires H from the clutch
coil terminal board. (Note location).
8. Disconnect pin connector F on left side of
drive unit.
9, Remove belt E after first removing its
idler roller.
10. Remove the three nuts A.
11. Remove screw R and space collar P.
NOTE: Do not remove parts Q.
12. Supporting the multiply unit: from the
bottom, remove nuts D and their respecrive screws. The unit will now be free
to be removed. Move the unit to the
right until the side frame clears the studs
of parts Q. lower the unit and remove.
CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE
For Form 3747
ButT"oughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
8
Section VI
REPLACEMENT:
Replacement is accomplished by reversing
the removal procedure.
NOTE: Adjustment of the computer timing
cam switches (step 6) is covered in
Section III Mechanisms and Adjustments.
Removal of the Components Unit
NOTE: Right and left directions are given
facing the rear of the machine.
1. Remove printed circuit board K.
2. Disconnect pill connectors M and J on
bottom of component unit.
3.
~move
the three nuts I on the right hand
side of the unit.
4. Remove the two screws
of the unit.
a on the left side
5. Position the flat surface of the coupler on
the component clutch drive shaft in Ime
with the cut out in the side frame.
,
6. Move the left side of the unit far enough
rearward so the. fork will clear the stud
between the holes for screws O. Lower the
left side and move the. unit to the left until
the coupler member on the component
clutch drive shaft clears the side frame.
Remove the unit from the machine being
careful not to lose the leather coupler.
REPLACE:
a. Machine should be in home position.
b. Component unit shOUld be in home
position.
NOTE: Check the guide holes in the
platen drive cams to be in line.
With these conditions, the members of the component platen
drive shaft should mesh without
binding. (Adjustment of these
parts is covered in Section m
Mechanisms and Adjustments).
Removal of Drive Unit
1. Remove multiply unit from machine.
2. Remove component unit from the multiply
unit.
3. Set the product accumulator on its end,
(with the pulse generator up and cluster
accumulator pinions toward the person
doing the removing).
4. Remove the four screws and nuts that hold
the side frames of the drive unit and the
product accumulator together. Pull the
transfer link, this will unmesh the gears of
the cluster accumulator pinion shaft and the
gear on th~ drive unit.
5. Holding the product accumulator unit with
the left hand turn. the drive unit to the right
and lift up, separating the two units.
REPLACE:
a. Set accumulator on its end. Pull the
.transfer link and trip clutch on the
drive unit.
b. When replacing the drive unit, first
mesh the coupler members that drive
. the product accumulatOr main cam
shaft. Then lower the drive unit into
place and replace the four screws and
nuts,
'13tirroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Boole
Section VI
9
COMPONENT UNIT - DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
1. Remove the constant running clutch drive
shaft.
2. Remove eight screws and nuts holding the
end plates to the front and back plates.
10. Remove the bearing bracket for the left
hand clutches to allow removal of driving
belts (note location of shims. if any. on
clutch shaft).
11. Carefully disengage and lower clutches.
3. Remove two screws holding the bracket for
J204 and J207 to the right end plate.
4. Remove four screws holding the lower
crossbrace to the back and front plate.
5. Remove four screws holding the lower
platen camshaft brace to back and front
plates.
6. Remove the mounting screws for the four
clutches plate assemblies (1 for adjustment
eccentric and 2 others per assembly).
7. Remove three screws holding the wiping
contact assembly which contacts the digit
selector (on the back of the left hand shifter
disk).
8. Remove four screws holding the upper
platen camshaft brace to the back and
front plates.
12. Lifting up on the wiping contact assembly
which contacts the digit selector (on the
back of the left hand shifter disk), carefully
remove the shifter disk assembly.
13. Remove the function table disks.
14. For platen removal. remove eight mounting
screws.
15. Assemble in reverse order.
NOTE:. In reassembling care should be taken
to prevent distortion of wiping contacts and to ensure that the left hand
function table clutch engages its
nylon gear in home position within
range of the adjusting eccentrics.
The three other clutches can be
disengaged after the unit is reassembled.
9. Carefully lower the front and back plates
and the right end plate.
Printed in U. S. America
Revised 7-1-63
For Form a747
F2000 PRODUCT ACCUMULATOR
To replaoe total bail shaft assembly - 2FMA 6: (References are
to F2000 Symbol Book dated 12-1-60).
1. Remove ooupler and degree indioator dial from PA camshaft R,
Plate 33.
2. Remove both end platos of PA, (AX and A, Plate 30). (Be
careful to set these plates down without pulling wires).
3 springs on one plate.
3. Remove pinion solenoid assembly (inoludes P &: N, Plate 35).
Be oareful to set this assembly down without pulling wires.
4. Remove olapper. reset shaft assembly L, Plate 34.
springs Q, two springs S &: V and braoe 0).
(Four
5. Remove screws and olip from braoe M, Plate 33 (there are
2 of these braoes; this step applies only to the ono nearest
the degree indioator end of shaft B).
6. Remove four springs T. Plate 32, two springs 0 and X and
link S; also two bracesF. Plate 31.
7 Remove pinion shaft assembly G &: Q, Plate 31, and transfer
shaft assembly W, Plate 32, together noting positions of
four latches R and V and arm Q.
8. Slide total bailF. Plate 32, out of assembly after removing
keys E.
9. Remove total bail shaft assembly AA after removing brace K.
10. Replaoe in reverse order, remembering to have P. A. on flat
surface for reassembly so that the unit will not be twisted
after assembling.
Estimated time four hours.
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section VII
•
ELECTRICAL REFERENCE
INFORMATION
Printed in U.S.Amerlca 12-1-62
,
I
For Form 3747
2
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Section VII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL REFERENCE lNFORMA TION
Page No.
Component Docation Charts
Top View •••••
Right Side Frame
Components Unit •
Power Supply
Relay Plate
Operand Storage Unit Printed Circuits
Multiplier Storage • •
Multiplicand Storage.
Contact Assembly
Timing Charts
Timing Cams . • • • . . • •
Product Accunulator Timing.
Relays. • • • • • . . • • . • • • • •
Product Accumulator Resistor Board and Color Code
Platen Pin Chart . . . . . .
..
Pin Terminations on Platen.
Components Unit Disks
Right Hand Shifter • •
Left Hand Shifter. . •
Right Hand Shifter Position Selector
Left Hand Shifter Follow -Up Commutator
and Right Hand AUXiliary Control
Digit Selector • • • • • • • •
Right Hand Function Table . • . • • •
Left Hand Function Table •••• • •
Right Hand Function Table Position Selector •
Left Hand Function Table Follow-Up Commutator ••
Left Hand Follow-Up Circuit-Shifter . • • • • • • •
Left Hand Follow -Up Circuit -Function Table. • • • •
Electrical Component Function Chart • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Solenoid Resistance Table • • • • • •
Schematic Diagram - 1/10" Tab ••
Schematic Diagram - Side Insertion
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
..
.- .
'
10~11
12.
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
23
24-28
29
31
33
Sec.
vn
Burroughs - Series F2000 InstructiohBook
TOP VIEW
0) .... 1011)
0000
NNNN
I/) I/) (lHn
r-l
I g,
I~ I
~~
L_J
NN
1/)1/)
'-L-
&5
I S219 I
I S215 I
I S217 1
L S21S J
L S216 I
I S220 I
CR220
ICR224
01 c2021
ITB20si
I S243 1
r----.I
1 23
,
I
I B201 I
I ___ ..JI
L
roo-olS
TB2101
boo
JA
GEAR BOX
r - - - -,
__
I1.. _".
•
'~STAS
...II
r-r-r-
ON~~~
NNN
1
PRINTING
I
0
1/)1/)1/)
................
onl"l
NN
1/)1/)
KEYBOARD
I
1
11:11:
ecec
IIJIIJ
;.J;.J
0(,)
I"l
I"ll"l
1\IN
,
I/)fI)
OS 204 0
+1
[I]
on on
~~
'"
..
0)
NN
NN
1/)(1)
1•
~~
r;::~
1.--------------"'----1 ;.J
r:~~
0~02
0~3
OS0201
'OON~
~~NI-____~l
) _____~LJ~__~~____~~____~~______
t-
'--
Printed in U.S. America
'
12-1-62
I/) ' " ' "
......... L-
FIg. VII - 1
For Form 3747
:u
1- - - - - - - I
I
52.5.5
(IN5IDE)
I
I
I
5230
(OU'l'SIDE)
5234
(INSIDE)
I
c:::::J 0
~E
I
8
\S;;J4
1 J 0-
5287
~TB224
.
~CR229
TB206
5265
5264
5263
5262
5229
(OUTSIDE)
5228
(INSIDE)
I
I
I
I
I
TB20.5
L221
I
----,
D5204
(O;;;;~E) ---~
6~
I
5232
(INSIDE)
5233
(OUTSIDE)
~A
--I
TB220
L236 /
5231
L233
5261
5260
N"ote:
An terminal boards shown are numbered left to right. A terminals outside, B terminals inside, except for TB205 which is reversed.
Fig. VII - 2
£
>-1
en
§
v'
~
~
\
\
r'J
),
Disk $1 front - Right hand shifter position selector
Disk 1 rear - Right hand shifter
DiSk·t front - Left hand shifter
Disk
rear - Digit selector
~,.,
/I
1-'
,),
;
.
Disk #=3 front - Left hand follow up circuit
Disk #=3 rear - Left hand shifter follow up commutator & right
au%iliary controls
Disk
Disk
t
Right hand function table position selector
front
4 rear - Right hand function table
19.
Disk =#=5 front - Left hand function table
Disk #=5 rear - blank
§,
Disk #6 front - Left hand follow oireuit functi on table
Disk 1/=6 rear' - Left ,hand funotion table follow up oommutator
()
~
'"
5·
~
m
~~7.
COIL L229
CR
~
~
.,en
Z
-.,
c:
Z
I LHFT-l
.....
,
.....,
I LHFT-2
t>:)
~
~
LHFT-3
CD
g
t>:)
'"
I~
TB222~ .
0
~
~
'012
...~.
.,
N
T820?
0
0
e-I=t
0
s::
n
"o·
::I
COIL 1227
n
,(RHS-lb:W
RHS-2 ' L!
(
RHs-3~r'-----BACK PLATE
Fig. VII - 3
8
:.:-
Fig. VII - 4
Sec.
vn
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Bool:
7
RELAY PLATE
DODD
K201
MULTIPLY
K202
K203
K204
START
SHIFTER
INTERLOCK
NEGATIVE
MULTIPLY
P203
5/S" Tab
R227
DODD
1..... 1
CR206
iu-n--G
ABU
TB211
1'202 J
K201
MULTIPLY
K202
K203
START
SHIFTER
INTERLOCK
K204
NEGATIVE
MULTIPLY
2
P203
1/10" Tab
D
DODD
K245
TAB DELAY
il.ll--~
~
'" "Io-U
i
~
K201
MULTIPLY
R206
1'202 J
K202
K203
K204
START
SHIFTER
INTERLOCK
NEGATIVE
MULTIPLY
@R231
AB
TB211
I
2
T8232
P203
Side Insertion
Fig. VII - 5
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
8
Section VII
OPERAND STORAGE UNIT PRINTED CmCUITS
MUL TIPLIER STORAGE
One printed circuit required for each column of machine capacity. The D pads
are not used. Each 0 pad is connected to
its left adjacent C pad. Terminal of pads
1 thru 9 and the lower Z pads are connected by buss wires to corresponding 1
thru 9 lower Z pads on all other multiplier printed circuits.
o
C
D
D,
Z
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. VII - 6
MUL TIPLICAND STORAGE
~
__..., 0
One printed circuit required for each column
of machine capacity. The two unnumbered pads
and the 0 pad are not used. All Ithru 9 pads
are connected by buss wires to corresponding
1 thru 9 pads on all other multiplicand printed
circuits.
2
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
Fig. VII - 7
Nylon gear and wiper contact assembly - viewed
from contact side.
Fig. VII - 8
Sec. VII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
9
TIMING CAMS
DEGREE SCALE
s 2,01
30"
0"
GATE
S 203
GATE L.H. SHIFTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
s 204
GATE LH. FUNCTION TA8 E CLUTCH SOLENOID
S 20S
START
s 20e
ENABLE RIGHT HAND
5 207
MULTIPLY
5 208
ENABLE
RH. FUNCTION TABLE a.uTCH SCLENOIO
150"
1~1~1.
121'
IOPEN
I
0" 2 0" 240' 2 0" 300" 330" 34 /0"
13110
CLOS
b..OSE
b..05E
iOPFN
~ r--
iOPEN
,:r-~.
INTERLOCK
h
OPEN
Ir-
n10"
10PEN
Ir-
mo
b..osE
HOLD
CARRY
10"
10·
RELAY HOLD
RELAY
90"
O>FN
PULSE SHIFTER INTERLOCK RELAY
5 202
60°
SIGNAL
290" ~
I~
IS· CLOSe
s 209
GATE
5 210
HOME MulTIPLIER ACCUMULATOR
OPEN
5 211
PULSE CLAPPER
OPEN
PlLSE GENERATOR
'r ~
Ir:~
10PEN
318°
.1
,
210.1 •
118"
110.15
OPEN
,:,
110·
'r- ~
1D.50 b.05E
BAIL SOLENOID
lIIlo
M6
72.IS"
4!)"
r h
5 212
PULSE
s 2\3
GATE MESHING CONTROL SOLENOID
OPEN
s 214
ENABLE
OPEN
TOTAL
L.tt.
BAIL SOLENOID
INTERLOCK
TIME SCALE - MILLISECONDS
5 221
S222 PULSE MlLT. ACCUMULATOR
MlLTIPLY
190°
II~ "i'
CLUTCH
~
200
400
1500
IZI·
.1°
OPEN
"
SOLENOID
ROUTINE
15·
-
PREMULTIPLY
..,
WlS
~.
...
40
sale GATE MANUAL OISAILE
ISI G
100
PULSE MULT. ~ NEG.MLLT. RELAYS
5223 GATE
OPEN
IOPEN
311~
IOPI"N
loPEN
110"
D.DSI'
Fig. VII - 9
Printed in U. S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
I-'
"tI
·uoc:....
INDICATOR
LATCH
t.....
W4f1"~f!#-ro-
8M. ~A
~ t-- .1 /
TOTAL BAIL
SENSING ARM
I-
.~
-
"""- r---...
~
Od'
...
QIfD
v-'" fIlA L LA
! ~V
.~
i"i
lilt ... 200- 2rtt" 220· 230-
~ r.!Jf' 110- r.7tI
tMI t9tI
3~
.......,.
3!CI' 3
ro
ie~-
..
()
0
0
K
'.
.......c
t1;j
'''''86-3
r---..
'"
I:f
g
V-0 reM ~H' lwFl ",,20 z'm ••n
/
V
iJ
C/)
~;
If"
f---I
V
B~IN fEXES FA'"
TOT
c
.....
.....
to" ACE pLEA! ON -L£ T", ~DC CL£ ONLY
1-:..
CLAPPER
PULS~
""
~i
1-"""" ~
TOTAL R,AIL
CA~RV
170"
t1;j
'~
Cl'ARV
RWT
'
....
,.- 140" 1&t:I ''''-
~~
~:
RESET
TRAPLATCH
'10'
..,., ,...
f - r--
CURFI£NT TO
ClAPP£A
lOCI'
l!!!
'tOTAL ElNL
........ D
CURRENT TO
Q.,APPER RESET
SOLENOID
...
tl
/
I!II"
10'
f1'
TOTAL
BA'L
0
f)
.,
H
.
-----
PLATEN
~
~
/
~~
>--
SENSING
V-"" ~T .. i"oc
Cl£
r
LE'
HAN
or
-
'"
.~;
III
~
I'ULSE
CON'l".A.CT
H
t~
GENEFiATCF1
GENERATOR
"'~T
\,~
1;&
~~
~
~!:
PULSE
LfT .... ~D C ~E
V
. '"
CUFlRENT TO
~
N'"
--r--.. f~
OPENINGS
#,
\-~
+
+
lUi
>z
l<46·j
=..
",st:"
'-
,.'"
,
~ ~
,.,"
~~
!!!:/:
:.::1'"
!II:!
+
,,,..)
+
+
". -.
(uS-
"
b:>
#6
i9(f
~~
'7
#8
ztG'
,z62',
.....
."
CLUSTER S ....FT
~
3L~·
0
~
.<0'
....
........
.,.......
.2'"...
.... ....
....
!5~t
~
360·
.",,'
9}
,30'
'"
320·
310'
300'
zo..
......
'TJ
OQ
....&>
.....
~
nO'
HO'
210·
en
~
Z60·
ZOO'
:5
23"
I
I-'
o
21:"U~~·
le!.-
"'~'
>6,,'
I~a·
0
0
0
"0'
z-zo·
ZIO·
100'
'00'
,eo"
...
'10'
,
,,,,,'
•
tI
..
Q
::0;-
....,,,'.. ....
I
I I !\Ie
10&-
'OC'
.ro·
110-
' '00'
..",. ......
8d
,,' .....
~
...,,,',,,. .,::: t ___
.o'
eI
.
. __
,..~ww~~_w~w_~~~_~~~_~~_~~_~_m
MlALNt ~T MOIf
-
CAM
,,',..
~U
___ _
p
'30'
13~·
L.........., ""
~
(')
........0
to
It:~·
,AEV",.
'"
!=;
I
14~·
ta'
$'
fI'
CI'---
.0"'. rAE"'-".
0
0
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
12
Sec. VII
RELAYS
7=
6
26
-25
51---==~-+=~24
29
= 27
c:::s
26
~25
==- 24=23
7
6.....
5 =
4=
==>
t=
<=
....
28
26
=25
==>
24
X2
XI
X2
28
==23
22
=21
XI
VIEW FROM TERMINAL END
\ K205
\.
29
27
26
=
=>
=I==~f
XI
c=
I
/.
Xl 0 '- _.,/ 0 X2
TOP VIEW
Fig. VII-ll
X2
0=
0=
XI
22
21
X2
Sec.
vn
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
13
PRODUCT ACCUMULATOR RESISTOR BOARD
E203, E204
I-oo@
~
R202 R201
r
@
Note: E201, 2, 3, 4 were formerly TB213, 14, 15, and 16.
COLOR CODE
0- BLACK
1 - BROWN
2- RED
'3 - ORANGE
4-
I
YELLOW
5 - GREEN
6- BLUE
7- VIOLET
8- GRAY
9- WHITE
Fig. VII - 12
Printed in U,S. America 12-1-62
For Form 3747
o
I
en
~
.....
1!
3M( 2M( 51(
Fig. VII - 13
<
::::
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VII
PIN TERMINA TlONS
ON PLATEN
2
6
8
0
10
15
4
12 °
14°°3°5°7
° ° 0° ° 2~~ °0 ° 00
o
16
18
20
22
24
9 0 II 0 15
15
17
19 0 21
23 0
Z7
26
o
29
0
0
,0/
0
28
30
32
34
° 31 ° 33 ° 55 ° 57
°
39°36°38°40°420
o 41 0 43 4S 0 47 0 49
°44°46°.0 soO
°
0
0
51
o
0
53
0
Pin - Term.
Pin - Term.
Pin - Term.
Pin - Term.
1PG
5PG
4PG
2PG
9PG
6PG
8PG
7PG
3PG
-
21
25
13
17
11
15
9
27
23
5MB
2MB
9MB
3MB
4MB
7MB
8MB
1MB
6MB
-
32
33
35
28
29
4A .~- 4
3A ,~- 2
2A
14
1A ,M]- 16
9 pulse - 55
5 pulse - 25
20A - 46
19A - 48
18A - 42
17A - 24
16A - 22
15A - 40
14A - 50
5R. O. - 44
13A - 38
9CL - 41
5A ,[MI- 8
. 12A - 26
6A
10
7A.~-12
11A - 36
lOA - 20
9A - 18
8A - 6
7A - 12
6A - 10
12MC - 1
10MC - 7
11MC - 53
8MC - 19
9MC - 51
6MC - 5
7MC - 39
4MC - 49
5MC - 43
2MC - 45
3MC - 47
1MC - 3
,IM!-
34
37
30
31
,IMI-
LEGEND: A - Accumulator Column
MB - Multiplicand Bus
MC - Multiplicand Column
PG - Pulse Generator Contact
Used on Clear
o-
~
Fig. VII - 14
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
16
Sec. VII
RIGHT HAND SHIFTER DISK
17 .................,
6
12
II
Fig. VII - 15
LEFT HAND SHIFTER DISK
21
5
6
"'_...
Fig. VII - 16
_-
16
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VII
RIGHT HAND SHIFTER POSITION SELECTOR DISK
17
(S277)
o
/7
5
6
/6
I
Fig. VII - 17
Disk shown in home position
Wiping contact connections (logical):
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
-
R.O. release solenoid
S264D (8 shift)
S264C (7 shift)
S264B (5 shift)
S264A (2 shift)
R.H.S. clutch solenoid
DZ switch, col. 1
DZ switch, col. 2
DZ switch, col. 3
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
Bl - DZ switch,
B2 - DZ switch,
B3 - DZ switch,
Cl - DZ switch,
C2 - DZ switch,
C3 - DZ switch,
Dl - DZ switch,
D2 - DZ switch,
D3 - DZ switch,
col.
col.
col.
col.
col.
col.
col.
col.
eo!.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
18
Sec. VII
LEFT HAND SHIFTER FOLLOW - UP COMMUTATOR
AND RIGHT HAND AUXILIARY CONTROL DISK (S279)
21
5
11
6
16
12
II
Fig. VII - 18
Disk shown in home position
Wiping contact connections (logical);
1234-
K201-27 (CB+)
S203 -NC (L. H. S. clutch solenoid)
K201-23 (CB+ for homing)
R.H.S. clutch solenoid (for homing)
567"
8-
S201-NO (K203 pick circuit)
CB+ with disk out of home during multiplication
Supplies CB+ to 5, 6 and 8 during multiplication
Directional key block solenoid and S284-NC
Sec.
vn
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
19
DIGIT SELECTOR DISK (S280)
17
5
16
6
12
11
I
10
Fig. VII - 19
Disk shown in home position
Wiping contact connections (logical):
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
-
Mult. storage col. 4 com.
Mult. storage col. 3 com.
Mult. storage col. 2 com.
S265A (2 shift)
S265B (5 shift)
S265C (7 shift)
S265D (8 shift)
S207 -C (K 201 hold circuit)
CB+ (to hold K 201)
Printed in U.S. America 12-1-62
B1
B2
B3
C1
C2
C3
D1
D2
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
- Mult.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
storage col.
5 com.
6 com.
7 com.
8 com.
9 com.
10 com.
12 com.
11 com.
For Form 3747
20
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VII
RIGHT HAND FUNCTION TABLE DISK
3
Fig. VII - 20
LEFT HAND FUNCTION TABLE DISK
8
Fig. VII - 21
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VII
21
RIGHT HAND FUNCTION TABLE POSITION SELECTOR DISK (S276)
8
3
Fig. VII - 22
Disk shown in function table 1 position
Wiping contact connections (logical):
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
-
R.H.F. T. clutch solenoid
R. H. F. T. clutch solenoid
Mult. storage 9 bus
Mult. storage 8 bus
Mult. storage 7 bus
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
-
Mult.
Mult.
Mult.
Mult.
Mult.
Mult.
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
6 bus
5 bus
4 bus
3 b~s
2 bus
I bus
For Form 3747
22
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
LEFT HAND FUNCTION TABLE FOLLOW - UP COMMUTATOR
(5278)
Fig. VII - 23
Wiping contact connections (logical):
l-K202-4 (C.B.+)
2 -S204 - NC (L. H. F. T. clutch solenoid)
Sec. VII
Sec.
vn
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
23
LEFT HAND FOLLOW - UP CIRCUIT DISK - SHIFTER
Fig. VIl-24
LEFT HAND FOLLOW - UP CIRCUIT DISK - FUNCTION TABLE
I
Fig. VII-25
Printed in U.S. America
12-1-62
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
24
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT FUNCTION CHART
520( COMPONENT
5201
S202
5203
S204
5205
S206
S207
5208
S209
5210
S211
S212
S213
5214
S215
5216
S217
S218
S219
S220
5221
5222
5223
S225
S226
S227
S228
S229
S230
S231
S232
52-If'
d1
@~
FUNCTION
Picks K203 during multiply routine to enable the R.H. 5. to
shift one position when required.
Gates R. H. F • T. clutch.
Gates L.H.S. clutch.
Gates L.H.F. T. clutch.
Times drop out of K202.
Makes the right hand interlocks active prior to picking the
accumulator clutch solenoid for the right hand platen stroke.
Provides hold circuit for K201 in L. H. 5. position 21 where
S280 opens.
Provides carry pulse for product accumulator.
Gates pulse generator and 9 pulse for clear after round off.
Ensures that the multiplier unit is in home position before
starting a multiply routine.
Pulses clapper bail solenoid on manual or programmed clear. (6)
Pulses total bail solenoid for manual or programmed clear (6) and
clear after round -off.
v'l--~'J
Pulses meshing control solenoidlwhen K201 drops out.
Makes left hand interlocks active prior to picking the accumulator
clutch solenoid for the left hand platen stroke.
Program clear CA) lane 51 (66).
Disables a pre-multiply set up in previous stop - lane 47 (62).
5tart multiply - lane 48 (63).
In B+ circuit to decimal light, DS203 - lane 49 (64).
In B+ circuit to decimal light, 05201, DS202 - lane 50(65).
Enables crossfooter non -clear lock - lane 46 (61).
Provides CB+ to 5260 (lane 41) and to Man. Neg. Mult. S232
Pulses multiplier accumulator clutch solenoid, keyboardstop
solenoid, symbol slide stop solenoid, and register designation
stop solenoid during manual or programmed Clear
Delays starting of multiplication until completion of previous
sensimatic cycle. Drops K245 at 350 of 5ensimatic cycle.
Prevents dropping K201, and/or K204, if the non -multiply key
has been depressed with the Sensimatic home.
1/10" and 5/8" tab: Prevents start of multiplication when
carriage is in motion.
1/10" and 5/8" tab: Supplies CB+ to hold K201 when carriage
is in motion.
Completes AC circuit to K205.
Breaks DC circuit to On Key Latch solenoid.
Supplies CB+ or MB+ depending on position of carriage control
disabling lever.
Drops the hold circuit for K204 during product transfer.
Allows K204 to be picked at 490 ofSensimalic cycle.
Section VII
Section VII
COMPONENT
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
25
FUNCTION
S233
Non -multiply switch. Prevents picking K201 and/ or K204
with NON X key depressed.
S234
In a programmed negative multiply position, allows K204 to be
o
picked at 49 of CF "A" negative total or subtotal 5ensimatic
cycle.
v 'S235
R.H.S. 2, drops K203.
v'S236
L.H.8. 3, in CB+ c:iJ::uit to digit selector
'S237
L.H.F. T. 2, in CB+ circuit to digit selector
VS238
R. H.F. T. I, alternate hold circuit for R. H. F. T. clutch solenoid.
-5239
R. H.F. T. 3, breaks pick circuit for R. M. F. T. clutch solenoid.
S240
Breaks pick circuit for decimal shift solenoid. By-passes
decimal shift enable switch for pre-shift when the C or M key is
used.
S241
In CB+ circuit to R. H. shifter position selector when the C or M
key is used or when a decimal shift of 8 is programmed.
S242
In CB+ circuit to digit selector when CorM key is used or when
a decimal shift of 8 is programmed.
S243
Transferred by the decimal shift timer slide when the decimal
shift tappet is released. In CB+ circuit to R. H. F. T. clutch
solenoid and R. H. S. clutch solenoid.
L. H. 8. 2, prevents left land platen stroke or R. H. S. single
column shift when L. H. S. is moving.
VS245
L. H. F • T. 3, prevents left hand platen stroke when L. H. F • T.
is moving.
,S246
R.H.8. I, breaks pick circuit to R.H.8. clutch solenoid S247
R.H.S. 3, prevents right hand platen stroke when R.H.S.
is moving.
S248
Manual delta clear switch 3
RELAYS
S223
T6205-A10
""'"-0----0-.....
1.5<>---,
)(2 MULT
NEG X2
TB204
XI
MULT
B5
S2?2
MAN NEG
MULTKEY
29
E219
ZONE6
1.4
21
1.6
B6
TB206
5 B4
5234
TS204
SZ07-NC
ZONE4
6-.0----
5231
B6
5216
~
K204
22
1.8
202
~
1.5
E220
TB206
RELEASE
NEG MULT
S239
=t~7
P202-e
ZONE 7
J'
C.F.ANEG
AI TB202 81
R222
'OK
2W
207
5)
>-----....... 527&1.2
2H3
1200
2W
207
F
ZONE 5
P207-C
ZONE5
J204-62
ZONE7
5227
IN TAB
K201 -24
ZONE 7
--<202
X
CR204
E222
L227,
2
E224
2
207
~-'--9:-:-:-< 6
E22~
.1
TB2Z2
+-----t
5246
4H5
510
2W
R.H,F.T
4B5
510
207
2W
+
,-------~~~~-------------------ir-------------~~~~
204
Printed in U.S.A. America 6-1-60
For
Form 3747
Burroughs
SERIES F2000
COMPUTER
INSTRUCTION BOOK
Section VIII
•
CORRECTION INDEX
I
Printed in U.S.America 12-1-62
For form 3747
,
~
C,
Sec, VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Ins truction Book
~~~~~~~~~~---
l
No. 1008
CORRECTION INDEX
.cONDITION: Bending or breaking of the decimal shift tappeto
TO
TO
TB20S-KlA--r P204-23
CAUSE: Operator manually tabbing or returning the carriage through a multiply position
with a pre~muitiply condition previously
indexed ..
COHRECTION: Install decimal shift interlock
s\,litch, S284,if the above situation ,is
observed.
1"\
v
rhe interlock switch prevents energizing of
the decimal'shift solenoid (L225) unless the
(iirectional'ley block latch (similar to part
''J3', Plate *} Series F2000 Symbol Book) has,
dropped into the cut-out of the blocking slide
(K,same plate) to prevent depression of the
TAB or RET key. Wiring of the switch is
shown in Figure 1.
~:B22~IO
NC~
__
C"Oo..-
NO
8
T822D-9
A
TOS243-'C
Fig.l
PRO CEDURES : '
P-I" Hemove the keyboard.
i--2 " Hemove the two screws in bracket K, (Plate 9-1, Seri~s F Symbol
Book) 0
Hemove the old drive arm brace and latch assembly.
Remove the two directional key block bracket scre.lS" (Caution: .Do
not drop space washers that are under bracket.)
Assemble the new latch to the new
drive arm brace as shown in Figure 2, using the s crew from the
old assembly"
L.-6. Install the new drive arm brace
in the machine.
I--{o Install the old latch spring on
the nel'] latch and brace.
<-Bo Assemble the switch to the brace
as shown in Figure 2.
-<:--9.. Connect springs to the drive arm
brace and replace screws removed
in step 2"
Fig.2
10 0 Heplace and adjust the directional
key block assembly" Refer to Tests and Adjustments, page 3, Section
IV, F2000 Ins truction Book"
11" Momentarily hold the directional key blocking slide to the left to
permi t the latch to drop into the cutout of the slide.. With the
latch in this position, there should be ,,003" to ,,00511 clearance
between the ear of the latch and the s!\>dtch actuator.
!
Printed in U.S. America 3-30-60
(1)
For Form 3747
No. 1008
PROCEDURES:
Sec. VIII
Burroughs -SeriesF2000 Instruction Book
Conttd
To adjust, loosen nut A, Figure 2, and move switch up or down as
required.
S~
120 Remove and discard the screws (AD, Plate ~, Series F2000 Symbol
Book) which hold TB204andoTB205.
130 Place the new terminal board, TB220, on the outside, adjacent to
TB204, and reassemble the terminal boards to the auxiliary side
frame using the nevJ longer mounting screws.
140 Connect one end of a l5-inch length of wire to the normally closed
contact of the interlock switch, 5284, using spaghetti sleeving
and a single taper tab receptacle.
15. Insert the wire through the spaghetti sleeving around the wires
leading to the directional key solenoid.
16.. Connect the other end of the wire to TB220B-IO using spaghetti
sleeving and a single taper tab receptacle.
17. Connect one end of a lS-inch length of wire to the common terminal
of the interlock switch, using spaghetti sleeving and a single
taper tab receptacle.
18. Insert the wire through the spaghetti sleeving around the wires
leading to the directional key solenoid o
190 Connect the other end of the wire to TB220B-9 using spaghetti
sleeving and a single taper tab receptacle.
20 0 Remove the taper tab receptacle from TB206B-10, cut the wires from
the receptacle, and splice a l3-inch length of wire.t 0 the wire
that goes to the decimal shift enable switch, s2h3. Tape the
splice.
210 Connect the other end of the new wire to TB220A-9 using spaghetti
sleeving and a single taper tab receptacle.
22. Connect a 13-inch length of wire together with the remaining wire
previously cut to TB206B-IO using spaghetti sleeving and a double
taper tab receptacle.
230 Connect the other end of the new wire to TB220A-IO using spaghetti
sleeving and a single taper tab receptacle ..
PARTS REQUIRED FOR FIELD INSTALLATION:
Description
Number Required
Jo Part No o
lFX83-l7
Switch
1
/,J IFB238-3
Brace
1
IFB748
Latch
1
J1 lJ~EA252-4
Terminal board
.
1
J FX4S-29
Post
t. \-\ 0 \)))
2
j ~:~f)=..
~~~ew
(-1-
~ G - 'J)
I>
J- ~
~
~
X170-46
Nut
2
X42-1
Single taper tab receptacle
6
J 24B No o 12
Double taper tab receptacle
1
) Fx41S-S
Spaghetti sleeving for Xh2-1
6
4398 7/8
Spaghetti sleeving for 24B No. 12
1
Approximately 3 hours are required to make this correction. (Machines
with serial number FI01479 or higher incorporate this correctiono)
(2)
Sec • VIII
NQ. 1009
Burroughs - Series f2000 Instruction Book
CDRRf~:TIDN
INDEX
I
CCNDITION: Fai ling to multiply as a result of dropping the pre-multiply
relay in a carriage position where an adjacent magazine contains a DPM
pin.
CAUSE: Carriage overthrow, at the completion of a tabulation or return,
permits the DPM pin, located in the magazine next to the active magazine,
to momentarily open S216 before S227 is closed again, allowing K20l to
drop out.
CDRRECTIDN:
Instal1,as required,a capacitor in parallel with the normal- .
1y closed contacts of S216, to delay the drop out of K201 from transfer
of S216.
PROCEDURE:
1. Cut the taper tab receptacle off the single wire on S227 N.D. terminal.;
2. ct:l.mp a, double taper tab receptacle, to the end of an 1Bu length of
wire"., together with the wire in Step 1 and' place on tab of $227 N.D.
3. Using a solder less terminal, connect the other end of the IB" wire to
TB20BA-4. (Move 6 wires located at TB208A and B2, 3, 4, one place to
the right, facing the rear of machine, leaving terminals 4 and 5 free
for new wiring.) Keep all new wires parallel and secured to existing
harness wiring. .
4. Remove the w~res from S216C.
5. Using a solderlessterminal, connect the wires that connected S2l6c
to S227C (step 4) together with one end of an 8" wire to TB20B.A-5.
6. USing a double taper tab receptacle, connect the other end of
the 8" wire to S2l6c along with the wire that goes to S207NC
7. Connect the + lead of the capacitor to TB20BB-4 and the - lead to
TB20BB-5.
S227
TB208-5
~202
B_--l1't'
...
B
:A
•
I'll. " r
TB208-4
TO S223
TO S207
,
','
PARTS REQUIRED FDR FIELD INSTALLATIDN:
Part Number
lAEX89-1
24ANo. 10
M3202-40
M3202-40'
2hB No. 12
Description
1 Mfd. 600 V capacitor assembly
Solder1ess .terminal
Wire (18 11 long)
Wire (8 11 long)
Double taper tab receptacle
Print.ed in U.S. America h...,22-60
(1 )
Number Required
1
2
1
1
2
For Form 3747
B~rou~s: ;·~,Set::ies.
, '. '. Cit;..~
'."
:F2QOO., Instruction Book
> , '
Sec. VIII
•
I (Contfd)
This change will be incorporated in all F2000 machJnes with 1/10" tab.
Approximately one hoW.- l's required to install this correction.
,j
II
CONDIT.ION:Br,eak;~~~ off of th~fdlreaded portion ~r stripping of the
'
threads of the , core: (N, Plate~, Series F2000 Synibol Book) of the to~al
bail solenoid or clapper bail solenoid assembly of the product accumulator 'Wbile tightening the retaining nut.
CAtrSE('E?cces$ive
pressure ,used
when tightening the retaining nut.
Or."
•
,
CORRECTION: Replace the coil and core as required with a new cemented
. coil and core assembly. The new core is not threaded but is retained on
its bracket by a speed nut. The old style core is no longer available
for service replacement. The service replacement for an old core is the
coil and pore assembly and the speed nv.t. Coils without the core, how-'
ever, .at';e$ti11 available (no change in symbol) as replacements where the
originat c,9ti3$ are still usable.
"
"
;
' . ~) ,:
.,
,
I"
Symbo,ls of the new parts are, 2FX73-1 for the coil and core assembly ,and
22··:N.o~J for, tl'lEf speed nut. Improvedpar.ts are" incorporated in machi,n~s
begihning with FIOl479P.
'
Installation time is approximately 2 hours.
III
CONDITION:
,
:,
.'
Failing to clear product accumulator on a transfer operation.
'
CAUSE: Product accumulator pinions meshing too deep with teeth of adding
racks, resulting in too much friction and prematurelimtting of adding
racks.
'
,
CORRECTION~Install
one ormor~ 3220 1/2 washers between add rack brace
"E" (Plate .aG-, F2000 Symbol Book) ,and each mounting bracket, to ensure a
non-binding mesh of all pinions and add racks when screws "Fit are replaced and ti~tened.
NOTE: After installation of washers, make the following test.
1. Te ensure positive drive of product accumulator pinions by add rack
extensions -'
.
Add rack extensions should be free and centrallya,1igned with pinions
of product accUmulator.
')...",'
To adjust, move guide brace "E" (Plate .~, 1"2000 Symbo1 Book) laterally as required.
Installation time is approximately one hour.
(2) ,
,
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1017
CORRECTION INDEX - CHANGE NOTICE
CONDITION: Wrong multiplication.
CAUSE: Induced voltage surges When L23l or L225 drop out results in
the breakdown of CR204. The breakdown ofCR204 causes the right
hand shifter to overstep on one step shifts due to the hold circuit
created by the shorted CR204 and resistor 2B3 holding L226.picked
until K203 drops out.
CORRECTION: Install arc suppression diodes (lFB906) across
L23l and L225.
TB2088-3
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Install
on all machines on the next service attention.
INSTALlATION TIME:
(1) hour.
Less than one
L225
DEC
SHIFT
T8208A-2
+
+
CR224
CR220
T82088-1
T8208A-1
INCORPORATION DATE: All 1/10" tab
machines incorporate this change.
PROCEDURE:
1. Move six (6) wires located at TB208A. and B, 2, 3,and 4, one
place to the right (facing the rear of the machine) leaving
terminals 4 and 5 free for new wiring (terminal A is at top,
terminal B at bottom). If Correction Inde)c No. 1009 (installation of C202) has been applied to the machine, omit this
step.
2. Connect the unmarked lead of CR220 to JB20BA.-1.
3. Connect the unmarked lead of CR224 to TB208B-1.
4. Connect the + marked lead of CR220 to TB208A.~2.
5. Connect the + marked lead of CR224 toTB208B-3.
6. Correct the schematic wirtng and logic diagrams.
PARTS/REQUIRED:
Two (2) lFB906 diode assemblies.
Printed in U.S. America 9-15-60
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series
Sec. VIII
E'2000
Instruction Book
No. 1018
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
Wrong products.
CAUSE: Shorted diode in multiple factor circuit
causing incorrect shift.
F~!lO" ta~~~~~~U
v' CORRECTION: Replace diodes CR213, 214, 215, 216, 217 and CR218 (located on TB203) with FX43-13 diodes.
INSTALLATION REQUIREHENTS: The new diodes should be installed on all
machines with mUltiple factor storage. The diodes removed may be
retained in Branch and grip stock for use elsewhere in the F2000
and in other products.
INSTALLATION TIME:
tion.
v'INCORPORATION DATE:
ApprOXimately 1 hour is required for this correcSide insertion machines incorporate this change.
PROCEDURE: In removing the old and installing the new diodes, care
must be taken to prevent heat damage to the diodes. The diode
leads should be left as long as possible and the leads held with a
pair of pliers (between the diode and solder poipt) while soldering.
PARTS REQUIRED:
V
Symbol
Quantity
Description
Fx43-13
6
Diode
Unit List Price
I
Printed in U. S. America Revised
5-10-63
For Form 3747
Burroughs -Series.F2000 InstructionBoQ~ .",,",, .. No. 1020
Sec., VIII
<>
CORRlSCTION INDEX
/
.. :
'.,:1:;
'. .
"
CONDITI~:FaUing tOJ;,'elease repeat of machine operation or. locking
·.of ma.chin~. .
.~ .~
A
CAUSE: Bending of symbol restoring' arm due to obstructions or malfunc;t;.ions',ln
symbol mechanisms.
'
,.
'.,'
:
.
,
CORRECtiON':
Install redesigned' symbol restoring arm, which is cam
dt'iven away ft'om the symbol slides thereby allowing them to seek
their normal. limit.s •. , 'The. new arm and the. symbol slides are re .. '
',: tumedto nqrmalby,spring tension.
, • ."
.,,'
.1
'"
.
INSTAllATICN REQUIREMENTS: This'co:r~ection should be installed whenev- '
",erlt b~com~s necessary to .replace thesymbo1 restoring arm
(lFBl53-l) or when work is being done on the machine that exposes
the restoring arm.
INSTAllATION 'TIME:
correction.
'.
f.:
"
Approximately five (5) hours ·are requit'edfor this
Printed in U.S. America 10,:",11-60
(1)
For Form 3747
No. 1020
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
(Conttd)
lNCORPORATION DATE: 1/10 11 t9.b machine, serial F107l1.j.6P (Canadian
F820OC) and above, will incorporate this correction.
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove case and keyboard.
2. Remove the screws holding the terminal boards (TB204, 20.5, 206
etc.) to the right auxiliary sidefram,e.
3. Remove brace liNn, Plate 53, (Series F2000 Symbol Book).
4. Remove bellcranks for liOn" key, 1I0ffl! ReJi, "Neg. X", "Non XII,
II~I clear and drive trip interlock, noting location of clips
and springs.
.
5. Remove S287 and plate "Ell (Plate.53, Series F2000 Symbol Book).
6, Remove screivS holding the right auxiliary sideframe to the
base, the back"pIate and support posts.
7. Noting location of "Nil, remove shaft "K" (Plate 18, Series
F2000 S~nbol Book).
8. Slowly remove the right auxiliary sideframe, unhooking all
springs carefully •
9. Disconnect the symbol slides actuating springs.
10. Remove ann 11M", Plate 13 (Series F Sytnbol Book) noting location of co11ar "Z".
11. Remove shaft 11K" , Plate 17 (Series F:;?OOO Syrnbol Book) and discard space collar "U".
12. Remove shaft "ell (illustration).
13. Rem.ove and discard "J", "K", ilL", "M", and
(illustration~
lh. Remove nuts "AF" and space collar "AG", Plate 55, Series F2000
S~l1bo1 Book.
15. Remove arm "0", Plate 35, Series F2000 S~nbol Book.
16. Remove arm "A" and outer cam on right end of main camshaft,
marking outside of cam as identification for replacement.
17. Remove print control actuating cam from camshaft, marking outside of cam.
18. Remove s~nbol restoring arm actuating cam and discard.
19. Remove slides "R" and "W', Plate 51, Series nooo Syrl1bol Book.
Disconnect slide "L" at front only. Note location of clips
and collar.
20. Remove arm "AFlI, Plate 13, Series F Symbol Book.
21. Remove arm "Z", Plate h7, Series F Symbol Book.
22. Remove the symbol restoring arm by spreading the symbol slides
enough to work the arm up between the slides.
23. Install new symbol restoring arm "A II Ci llustrat ion).
2Lt. Replace the parts removed or disconnected in step 19, 20 and
21.
25. Repla~ shaft removed in step 11.
26. Install ne'lrl symbol restoring arm actuating cam, roller tmvard
inside.
27. Replace print control actuating cam, marked side outward.
28. Replace cam and arm removed in step 16.
29. Rep~ace nuts and spacer removed in step 14.
"N".
(2)
Sec. VIII
No. 1020
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
(Cont'd)
PROCEDURE (Cont'd)
30. Install new symbol slide block bail "BIT and space collar "0"
(illustration) •
31. Rehook symbol slide springs.
32. Replace arm "T", Plate 17, Series F2000 Symbol Book, and new
space collar (R of illustration), which replaces collar "U" tPlate 17.
33. Replace arm removed in step 15.
34. Replace parts removed in step 10:
35. Install spring anchor post "FII (illustration) in position 153,
Plate 55, Series F Symbol Book.
36. In'stall spring "DII (illustration) from symbol restoring arm to
new spring anchor post.
,
37. Replace aUxi1iary~sideframe, rehooking all springs, and replacing parts removed in steps 2, 3 and 4.
38. Replace plate liE", Plate 53, Series F2000 Symbol Book, installing screw 11111 (illustration) and spring anchor "H" in place
of the rear mounting screw.
39. Install spring "G" (illustration).
40. Turn the machine over slowly by hand to ensure proper operation.
.
41. Recheck adjustments for the symbol stop solenoid (page 9, Sec.
IV, Series F2000 Instruction Book) and transfer mechanisms
(pages 38 and 39, Sec. IV).
PARTS REQUIRED:
Reference
illustration.
Reference
Symbol
A
B
(not shown)
F
lFBl53-2
lFB698-l
*lFDl85...i€ 2.3
FX52-31
FX80-l72
74335
X232-852
X233-l78
20 No. 116
FXlO-420
21 No. 8
72830
D
0
I
E
H
R
P
G
Quantitl
Printed in U.S. America 10-11-60
1
1
Symbol restoring arm
Latch
Cam
Post
Spring
Spacer
Screw
Screw
Spring anchor
Spacer
Clip
1
Spring
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
~~'!/{) --I~9
I
(3)
Description
S~
f
~
For Form
37t~7
Sec •. VIII
No~
. Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
1022
CORRECTION DlDEX:
I
CaIDITIGh· Wrong multiplication - under ones or over nines.
a
-yf/
CAUSE: A loose or improperly adjusted bracket.c, P1~e 31:, Series F2000
Symbol Book, allowing clapper reset arms<1-W-, Plate 31, Series F2000
Symbol Book to interfere with the rearward portion of. hatchets -)t,X
P1.ate jO~~Series F200QASymbo1 Book, ~ich results in improper positioning of carry wipe~ '11, Platen, Series F2000 SyJilbolBook. This
may result in the loss of a carrtifpulse (or under one) or loss of the
pulse for a 'relay carry (under one or over nine).
V !"y'JAJ."y\
*,
CORRECnah RemoVe screw ~ (Plate
Series F2000 Symbol Book) and in~
stallone FXOO-320 shoulder screw. This will position the bracket in
an upward position, preventing any interference between the parts.
Removal of the components unit is necessat;Y in ol;'der to make this
change.
INSTAWTICD REQUIREMENTS: Install new screw when this condition occurs or
anytime it is necessary to remove the components unit for other causes.
INsrAWT~CE
rection.
TIME:
Approximately one (1) hour is required for this cor-
DICORPORATI~_ _
S~ec_._>'_VI~I_I
II - Cont'd
INSTALlATION TIME:
rection.
Approximately two hours are required for this cor-
INCORPORATION DATE: This change was incorporated beginning'approximate1y with machine number FI03042P.
PARI'S REQUIRED:
Symbol
FXBO-54
Quantity
Description
12
Spring
rSeC. VIII
Burroughs ... Series F2000 Inst:,l;'uctlon Book
No. 102;
CORRECTION INDEX
I
CONDITIClJ: Wrong multiplication and/or odd noises from the Product Accumulator.
CAUSE: Loss of back up or driving force to the Product Accumul~tor due
to shearing of pin A, Plate 50, Series F2000 Symbol Book dated
12-1-60, and/or wear of the bronze bushing in.hracket C.
CORRECTION: Replace coupler T and bracket C (if it is wo~ or contains
a bronze bushing). The new parts can be identified as follows s
coupler T has a larg~rhardened pin A and bracket C now has a. steel
. bushing.
INSTALlATION R5QUIREMENTS: This correction should be installed when
the abOVe cotuii tion occurs.
INSTAUATIONTIME: Approximately one (1) hoUr" is 'tesuppressto.ndio.de (CR229)
Double taper tabs
Single taper tabs
Terminal bo.ard (TB224)
\PIire
'Sec. VIII
'No. 102,9
CORRECTION INDEX; ,', ' '
CONDITION;
Unusual noise or locking on product ttMSfers.
CAUSE: 'Wear oftadmium. plated nuts IH"(P1ate22, Series F2000 Symbol
Book, dated 12-1-60) or unhardened add rack extensions, "A," (Plate
23, Series F2000 Symbol Book, dated l2-1~60) 'results in 'the stud on
the add rack latch failing to enter the lo'6kplate centrally on a
'
' ,,'
product transfer.
CORRECTION: Install new hardened concentric nut FX57-88 (no change
in symbol) or eccentric FX57-44 (early construction, no change in
symbol) and new hardened add rack extensions FMTl10-1 (no cha~ge in
symbol). HardenedFMT1l0-1 extensions ordered prior to 11-1-60 can
be identified by the red marking on their upper edge. Parts ordered
after 11-1-60 are of improved type regardless or marking. The new
hardened nuts can be identified due to their unp1ated finish.
INSTALLATION RE(lJIREMENTS: Machines which have worn nuts require new
hardened nuts and hardened extensions.
,Machines which have worn extensions require the new hardened extensions. These machines will have black or copper plated nuts which
may be used with the new extensions.
When installing add racks, the unplated nuts and hardened extensions
should b~ used. Use of only one hardened part accelerates wear of
the other.
Branch and grip stock of all extensions without the red marking which
were stocked prior to 11-1-60 should be discarded upon receipt of
the new parts. Branch and grip stock of all FX57-44 and FX57-88
plated nuts should be discarded upon receipt of the new unplated nuts.
INSTALl.ATION TIME: ApprOXimately three hours are required to replace
these nuts and extensions in one machine.
INCORPORATION DATE: Machines above serial number F105000p contain hardened concentric nuts and extensions.
Reference Plate 23, ,Series F2000 Symbol Book. (Dated 12-1-60)
1. Remove the four mounting screws from auxiliary senSing unit.
2. Remove ball L.
3. Remove the four screws F from guide combs E noting location of
any space washers under the combs.
4. Remove extensions A and guide camps E as a unit by tilting the
rear ends of the extensions up ,and front ends down to disconnect
from the add racks. '
'
5. After replacing the extensions, reassemble in reverse order.
6. Remove the liD" section to replace the FX57-44 or FX57-88 nuts.
PROCEDUREs
Printed in U.S • .Araeriea3-22-61
For Form 3747
I
No. 1029
PARTS REQUIRED:
Reference
Burroughs- Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
Reference Series F2000 Symbol Book. (Dateq 12-1-60)
Symbol
A (Plate 23) f1InllO-1
H (Plate 22) FX57 -44 or
FXS7-BB
Q\.lan t i t.l
12
Des:.ription
Add rack extension
12
Eccentric nut
12
Concentric nut
(2 )
'~~~~ I
()Iv
Burroughs _ Series 1"2000 Instruction Book
. sec. VIII
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION: Wrong multiplication or failure to multiply (5/8" tab
machines).
.
CAUSE:
Failure of lane switches due to W+'ious causes.
CORRECTION: Install 1/10 auxiliary sensing unit 3FMS1-1 (replacing 3FMS1)
which has new style lane switches. The listed wiring changes MUST be
made to ensure accurate operation.
202
- ....
CR227
"7
_-...
~TO
1 .
~
I:
~ 202
•____/\.. ___ I!I
K201-S
/.
202 D
67
L22;'/'"''
8240 ,,/""
I
I
I""" .....------- .. ,
/ /'
_..-,,,-".,
T8202
II
.... _____ .. I,
~I)J.
_ _ ... - -...../ ...II)-t TO 1(202-25
Ka02.
21
2~
AIO
T8206 BIO
TB204 810
K202-7
KNMHI( It It
J
~MOV£
.•
---------·-~"RITfpos.)
__ ... ____ RELOCATE
(HEWPOS.)
.
202
•.'
.. Tl20S· 84
..,
.
I
202
I
E216?
4~S279-'
204
- - - - ADO
·I'
:~",.'1.
~
...
"
TB224 : \,
T~
't
9E2rt
I,I
I CR22f'
I
•
~.
..:
1-..,
:
t
I
...
:
L2U
INSTALlATION REQUIREMENTS: This cqrreetionshou1d be made when excessive
failures of the lane switches are encountered. This correction re..;
quires installation of CI1008. (Note step 8 of procedure.) Installation of Cl1024 is recommended for improved operation.
INSTALLATION TIME: ApprOXimatelY six (6) hours are requir~d for this
correction if Cl100B and Cl1024 have already been installed.
~~
,
i~
Printed in U.S. Amertca5-12-6l,
For Form 3747
I
No. 1030-2
PROCEDURE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6 •.
7.
8.
9.
10. '
Burroughs - Series .• F,gpOO Instruction Book
$e<::~ ..
VIII
References are made to the f2000 Symbol Book dated 12-1-60.
LABEL and remove
5219
wires on TB208 and
0
0-:-0 021
wires connected to
0
Cl20
f (}
I
the lane switches.
0 0
0
02
Remove the Auxiliary
0
0
0
01
S ens lng Un it (3FMS 1 )
by:
0---11"'1'0 5201
a. Removing three
..------'l--TO
mounting screws
K202-23
I (Plate 7) and
scre•• C (Plate, 7).
b. Disconnect sensTO
ing levers.
TO
K202-25
. TO
Remove cross brace 0 ,K201-3
lr--t225
(Plate 10) by removing four mounting
5240
screws N (Plate 10)
CR229
and disconnecting
link D (Plate 14).
TO
Install new cross
5264-F'
L223
K202
brace. Parts E, F,
G and H (Plate 14)
should be transferred to the new
cross brace prior to installation.
Install the 3fr-1Sl-1 auxiliary sensing unit. Secure it to the
new cross brace by using spacer M (Plate 10) and two screws J
and lockwashers L (Plate 10).
Reconnect \vires removed in step one. As the lane switches are
now transferred at normal, reverse the N.O. and N.C. leads of
each switch. For example, the N.O. wire from S217 (lane 48) is now
connected to the N.C. terminal. The leads of each common are not
changed.
Replace aU electrical pins in lanes 46 thru 51 with new steel pins
(FC56-8!). It ,,rl 11 be negessary to grind off some! stock at the
side of FC56-85 pins for use in lane 51. Use the FC56-34 pin as a
template.
(a) For machines below FI01479 which do not incorporate Cl1008,
(S284).
1. Install CI1008, but omit steps 14 to 23.
",2. Install 15 in. wire from S284-NC to TB220-B9.
/ 3. Install 15 in. wire from s284C to TB220-B10.
4. Remove and discard wire from S243-C to TB206..;B10.
(b) For machines above FlOl479 or those in which CIlOO8 (S284)
h~s been installed previously.
1. Remove and discard wire from S243-C to TB220-1\9.
2. Remove and discard wire frpm TB206-BlO to TB220-1\1O.
Remove and discard wire from S264-E to S240-NO.
Remove two wires from S243-NCand connect to SZ43-C.
'--+--<:2~2.
-_--1,K~
No. 1030-3
Burroughs - Series f2000 Instruction Book
PRCCEDURE:
Continued
Install two new wires (6 ft. and 1 112ft.) to S240-NO. Connect
the 6 ft. wire to P202-P.
'
12. 'Remove and discard wire from s243-NO to P202-D. Remove wire
'from J202-D and connect toR201-1.
,
13. Using a taper tab connect a 2 1/2 ft. wire to S243-NC.
14. Remove the remaining wire on 1'B206-B10 and using a double taper
tab connect it and the 2 1/2 ft. wire (Step 13) to1'B206-B10.
'
15. Connect the 1 1/2 ft. wire (Step 11) to S243-NO by using a
single ,taper tab.
16. Install 6 in. wire from J202-P to 1'B202-A7.
17. Install CR227 (AEX).j.3-3) across TB202-A7 to 1'B202 ..B7. (Cathode,
marked +, at 1'B202-A7 side.)
18. Remove the two wires from K202-27.
19. Remove the wire from K202-23 (to K202-27) and discard.
20. Connect the remaining wire removed from K202":'27 (Step 18) to
TB202-B7.
21. Install a 1 ft. wire from 1'B202;"B7 to K202-23.
22. Remove the wire from P204-24 to P202-x and discard.
23. Move wire from P202-j to P2D2-x.
24. Move wire from 1'B204-AlO to TB220..A1O.
2~. Using a double taper tab connect. two wires (3 in and 1 1/2 ft.)
, to 1'B~20-A9. Connect the 3 in. wire to 1'B204-AlO. Connect the
3 112ft. wire to P204-24. _
26. Remove and discard wire from K202 ...Xlto J202-j.
27. Mount 1'B224 (FX4l-11) under $creW I (PtateS8 Series F200D Symbol
BQokdated 12-1-60) on t~e outside of the right auxi liary sideframe.
26. Remove BombtaUconneccors £216 and E217 (see L22), zone 7 F2oo0
,
'Wiring Sch.ematic [01'1/10" tab machines).
29 •.• ,Connect the two wires removed from E216 to one terminal of TB22J.j. •
.:30., Connect the two wires removed from E2l7 to the other terminal of
1'B224.
31.' Connect CR229 (AEX43-1) across the terminals of1'B224 wlth the
cathode (marked+)on the terminal 1i11 th the two wires removed
from £216 (B+ s fde orL223).
32. p,~ken6tation on machine wiring scn.ematic that these changes
have been made •
11.
• '<).,",:
,
Quantity
~l-
15
1
1
(approx.)
1
1
2
2
1
.23ft,~
5...12-6l
Description
Aux. sen~lr).g un it
DiOde,.' (CR229)
Died, (CR227)
Steetpins (electripal lanes)
Spacer
Cro$sbrace
$cf''ew
-LP9kwasher
1'l!!iper tab - doubl.e
taper tab - sing~e
11;1224
Wire
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
No. 1031
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
Wrong multiplication.
CAUSE: Breakage of a carry latch (G Plate 33, Series F2000 Symbol Book"
dated 12-1-60) due to contact with the transfer sha~t (N Plate 32, ,
Series F2000 Symbol Book, dated 12-1-60).
CORRECTION: Install lFMA103 (illustrated) brace to
stabilize the 1FMA58 transfer shaft.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: niis brace MUST be installed
at the next service attention on all machines.
INSTALLATION TIME: ApprOXimately one (1) hour is required
for this correction.
o
INCORPORATION DATE; Machines above serial #F116658P
incorporate this correction.
PROCEDURE:
1. R,emove components unit.
2. Remove and discard parts K and J (Plate 34,
Series F2000 Symbol Book dated 12-1-60).
3. Remove screw P. (Note screw P is ,changed on C.I. \022 Item I).
4., Insta.ll the'new brace on the left side
part 0 (Plate 34)
facing machine from the rear with the U shaped portion around
transfer shaft N(Plate 32).
5. Replace screw P (Plate 34)
6. Install new clip replacing J (Plate 34).
of
PARTS REQUIRED:
Symbol
Quantity
100103
1
X133-l05
1
Description
New brace
CUp
I
Printedtn U.S. America 4-15-61
For Form 3747
Sec. VIII
Burroughs -
Seri~s F2~00
No. 1032
Inst£Uytion '8ook
CORRECTION INDEX
C01~ITION:
CAUSE:
Wrong multiplication or failure to multiply.
Failure of component unit interlock switches (lFX83-45).
CORRECTION: Install new lFX83-73 switches, which can be identified by the
numper 16-430101 stamped on the case of the ~witch.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Install improved parts when this condition
occurs. Branch and grip stock of 1FX83-45 switChes can be retainE;d
fo.r use on other products.
INSTALlATION T]}ffi; Less than three hours are
correct~on in one oomponents unit.
r~quired
to install this
INCORPORATION DATE: All machines with the side inserted program unit in,...
corporate this correction.
PROCEDURE: After installing the new switches, make the
following adjustment to ensure closing the switches
without bottoming them. With the switch plungers
transferred by their actuator bail and the plungers
manually bottomed, there should be .005" to .010"
clearance between the switch actuator bail and the
switch plungers. To adjust, bend the switch actuator as required.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Sym£ol
IFX83-73
Quantity
12
Printed in U.S. America Revised
~iption
Licon switGh
8~2-62
Unit List Price
N.A.
For Form 37it7
No. 1034
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
'Wrong multiplication - 1/10" tab machines.
CAUSE: Wrong shift due to premature release or failure to reset the
tappet in lane h4, caused by residual magnetism of the clapper.
CORRECTION: Install improved clappers for L225
and L231 (no change in symbol) which may be
identified by the larger non-magnetic button
on the clappers.
B
INSTAllATION REQUIREMENTS: Install improved
parts when this condition occurs. Branch
and grip stoc1t of old style clappers (with
the small round non-magnetic button) should
be discarded upon receipt of the improved
clappers. The solenoid bracket should be
checked to ensure that the ctappers in actuated position are parallel \oJith the face of
the solenoid core and replaced if this condition is not met.
INSTAUATION Tl}TE:
correction.
c
E
Approximately one (1) hour is required for this
INCOHPOAATION DATE: Machine beginning with serial number F118492P incorporate this correction.
PHCCEDURE: After installing the improved parts the fo llowing adjustments should be made. These adjustments apply to both solenoids.
1.
2.
To ensure suffic ient hold of arm 1\ at normal and to permit re ...
latching -With arm A released, there should be .Ol.~O" to .060" air gap between the solenoid core and the non-magnetic pad of clapper F.
To adjust: Position limit blan1\s E as required.
To ensure a positive release of arm A -\Hth clapper F held against its core, there should be .005 11 to
.0lS" releasing clearance between the clapper and arm A.
To adjust; Position bracket C.
PAIlTS REQUIRED;
See illustration.
Reference
Symbol
Quantity
Description
D
IFMS7-3
IFlVlS7-h
IFlV1S1l-l
1
1
1
Clapper - lanes 42-h3
Clapper - lane 44
Bracket, includes
F
C
solenoids
Printed in U.S. America 6-8-61
For Form 3747
I
Sec. VIIL
Burroughs - SeriesF2000
.Inst~ction
Book
No. 1035
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION: The wiring schematic furnished with a limited number of machines does not show the correct. contact points for relay K202.
A limited number of service parts orders for the lFX47-35 (relay
K202) were filled with a substitute relay.
CAUSE: These machines and parts
orders were supplied with an
Automatic Electric relay in
place of the Clare relay normally furnished for K202. The
Automatic Electric relay has a
different contact arrangement
(see Fig. 1) which requires
wiring changes not shown on
the wiring schematic.
7
6
5
4
3
2
=
c=
c::::;,
c:::l
=
,.
_
==- 29
28
c=
a::::=
-
c=
Ct
all
t::Ie=
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
-
c::II
c::I .
6
5
4
3
2
1
IC:I
c:t
c:a
c:I
c:I
=
CI
=
at
=
=
I:Iif
29
28
27
26
25
24
~i
21
The relayscan.be identified
by the. manufacturers nam.e
stamped on the coiL
CORRECTION: Correct the machine
wiring schematic as shown in
Fig. 2.
Fig. 1
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: On the
next service attention to any
machine between serial numbers
Fl11000P and Fl16434P, which
contain a relay in position
K202 manufactured by Automattc
Electric, correct the machine
wiring schematic.
ZONES
ZONE 7
Any lFX47-35 relays in stock
of the Automatic Electric type
should be discarded.
I
INSTALLATION TIME: Less than one
(1) hour is required to correct
the wiring schematic.
PRCCEDURE: To replace the Automatic Electric Relay with a Clare
relay, use the following chart.
Printed in U.S. America 6-9-61
ZONE.
Fig. 2
For Form 3747
No.
Burroughs - SeriesF2000 Instruction Book
10.35
PROCEDURE:
Sec. VIII
(Cont'd) •
. Clare Contact
Number
1
2
.3
4
5
6
7
27
28
29
Wiring Schematic
Location
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
8
8
8
(Zone)
Corresponding Automatic
Electric Contact Number
27
Delete
1
2
.3
29
28
4
5
6
Contacts 21 through 26 are the same on both types of relay.
NarEs If a Clare relay is used to replace an Automatic Electric relay,
It Is necessary that a jumper wire be added between contacts 2 and
60f the Clare relay. This is not necessary on the Automatic Electricrelay due to the construction of contacts 27, 28 and 29.
Burroughs: Serles F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
!Io.
1036
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION: (1) Noisy vertical drive belts; or, (2) failure of IFX95-48
and lFX95-49 motor plate shock mountings.
CAUSE: (1) FX28-20 belt jumping teeth due to insufficient belt tension; or, (2) vibration of motor plate causing failure of the motor
plate mounts.
CORRECTION: Install the following parts to stabilize the motor plate
and give proper tension to the vertical belt.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: These new parts should be installed to correct
the condition of noisy vertical drive belts, and to replace the shock
mounts lFX95-48 and lFX95-49 when Branch stock of these parts is
depleted. The lFX95-48 and lFX95-49 shock mounts are no longer
available on Service Parts Orders.
lllSTAUATION TIME: Approximately one (1) hour is required for this
correction.
i
INCORPOAATION DATE: This change was incorporated beginning approximately with serial number Fll5500P.
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the vertical drive belt (I, Plate 57, Series F2000 Sym-,
bol Book, dated 12-1-60).
2. Remove and discard the idler assembly (M, AB, AE, AF, AG, Ali,
AI and AK).
3. Remove four (4) covers E, Plate 70, Series F2000 Symbol Book,
dated 12-1-60 and discard.
4. Disconnect Jl and J2.
5. Remove two (2) screws AG.
6. Remove two (2) nuts AR and carefully lower the motor mounting
plate.
7. Remove and discard parts B, C and D (four (4) places).
8. Discard two (2) parts ATo Retain two (2) parts AK.
9. Install the new parts as shown in the illustration.
A
J
Printed in U.S. America 7-25-61
H
G
F
E·
For Form 3747
I
No. 1036
Burroughs - Series F2000
Inst~ctlonBook
Sec. VIII
PROCEDURE: (Contfd).
10. Install parts AK, Plate 70, SeriesF2000 Symbol Book, dated
12-1-60, as shown in the illustration. (It may be necessary
to reposition parts Band J!of illustration).
11. Reassemble in reverse order.
12. After completing the assembly make the following adjustment
for proper belt tension.
There should be 3/4 to 1 lb. tension when. the belt is deflected 1/2 inch at its. center point. (Use Kit #408.)
To adjust, position nuts E. The twO nuts D and E, just above
Plate H should be locked together. (Care should be taken to
keep the front edge of Plate H parallel with the base casting.)
PARTS REQUIRED:
Reference
Sytl!bol
Quantity
DeSCription
B
C
D &E
F
G
FX60-373
BX-1-14
X170-81
X228-1058
X275-7
X170-229
X275-185
2
Rear mounting screw
Washers
Nuts (front)
Front mount ing screw
Lockwashers
Nuts (rear)
Washers
J
K
4
8
2
6
2
2
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 10.37
CORRECTION INDEX - CHA.NGE NanCE
CONDITION:
CAVSE:
Wrong indexing or accumulation.
Unable to maintain adjustment of motor overload clutch.
CORRECTION: Install improved 1FD66-5 overload clutch (no change in symbol) which can be identified by the bronze bushing in the driven
member, the black oxide finish and the single set screw.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A new improved clutch must be installed on
the next service attention. A frozen clutch can-cause considerable
damage to the machine in case of lock-ups. Branch and grip stock of
lFD66-5 clutches without the bronze bushing in the driven member
should be discarded upon receipt of new clutches.
INSTALLATION TIME:
tion.
Less than one (1) hour is required for this correc-
INCORPORATION DATE: The improved clutches were incorporated beginning
with machine number Fl22244p.
PROCEDURE: After installing the i~)roved clutch; make the following adJustment. To safeguard the machine against possible damage in the
event of a lockup -To adjust:
1. With the clutch cool, back off adjusting nut until the clutch is
too weak to cycle the Product Accumulator during a 20 place
clear operation.
2. Permit clutch to slip for approximately 15 seconds to warm
clutch.
3. Tighten adjusting nut until clutch will just cycle the Product
AccuIllulator during a 20 place clear operation.
4. Tighten adjusting nut three 0) additional notches.
Description
Quantit~ ,
PARTS REQUIRED:
S~~o ~
IFD66-5
Printed in U.S. America 11-8-61
1
Overload Clutch
For Form 3747
I
S'ec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1038
CORRECTION INDEX
I
CONDITIONs Wrong multiplication.
CAUSEs Loss of a pulse from the pulse generator due to insufficient
contact pressure.
C~TIONI
Install an FX80-205
baokup leaf for each 2FMB10
contaot (part A of illustration) •
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. I Th is
correotion should be made
when this problem Is en ..
countered.
-...-.._-8
INSTALLATION TIME. Less than
one (1) hour ia required for
this correction.
DATE. Machines
starting approximately with
serial number F12694SP will
Incorporate thl S ohange.
INCORP~TION
PROCEDUREs After installing the
FX80-205 leaves, check each set of contacts to break at 75 to 150
grams pressure (applied slowly to the nylon actuator) using the 2X
. leaf of gram gauge Klt No. 408 No. 2 (shop tool). If necessary,
replace the 2FMB10 contact. 2FMB10 contacts wlth FX80-20$ backup
leaves should.not be bent for adjustment.
..
-
PARTS REQUIRED. Eight (8) FXaO-205 leaves per machine.
NOTEs
this correctlon cancels C.I. 1033. Item I. dated 5-25 ..61.
II
CONDITION: Wrong multiplication.
CAUSE,
Loss of pulses from Pulse Generator due to dirty contact points.
CORRECTION,
Install seal (FMB39) under Pulse Generator cover.
INSTALlATION REQUIREMENTS, Install the seal at the next lService attention.
Printed in U.S!> America 1-31-62
For Form 3747
I
No. 10)8
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
II - CONTINUED
INSTALLATION TIMEs Approximately one (1) hour is required for this
correction.
INCORPORATION DATE: Machines with a serial number F1l950op and above
will incorporate this seal for the Pulse Generator cover.
PROCEDURE: Refer to Plate 52, Series F2000 Symbol Book, dated 12-1-60.
1. Remove cover P by removing three (3) screws Q.
2. Remove cam R.
3. Remove assembly H by removing three (3) screws T.
4. Reassemble with the FMB39 seal between. bracket F and assembly H.
5. See section IV, Series F2000 Instruction Book, for adjustment
of cam R.
PARTS REQUIREMENTS,
One (1) seal FMB39.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction ~Sook
Sec. VIII
No. 10.39
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
Loose tabs on TB209.
Frequent disconnection for removal of the
multiplier package.
CAUSE.
CORRECTION. Replace TB209 with P and J connector
212 to permit easy removal and replacemen~ of
wires when it is necessary to remove the
multiplier package.
INSTALLATION REQt1IREMEl(l'Sa IruJtal1 this correctlan
to prevent the above cond.it.lon. Retain TB209
(1A.EA2;2-4) for possible use elsewhere as
TB201, 204, 20;, 206, or 220.
Approximattty two (2) hours
are required for the abOft correction.
INSTAUATION TIMEs
m:::alPOOATION DATE. This change will be incorpor..
at~ beginning with serial nuraber F1222WU'.
-...
0
.,. .....
~
ii .
• 0'
PROCEDURE •
1. Remove and discard wire from. 1B209-BIO
E
to TB219-A2. (Reference - C.I. 1013,
dated 7-14-60).
2. Remove two wires from TB209-AI0 and
.
. connect to TB219-A2.
t
3. RemC)ve wire from P2Q6K to TB209-A9.
¥ ~
4. Add a new- wire (31 ft.) ftom. P206K
to 5261-E (use double taper tab).
5. Transfer the remaining wires on TB209 as followsa
~a Before soldering ~ wires to J212, slide the IF.X67-20
hood onto the hamess in order that it can be attachec1
to J212.
TB209A-l,to·'J212...A
1B209B-1 to P212-A
TB209A-2to J212-B .
TB209B-2 to P212-B
TB209A-3 to J212~
TB209B-3 to P212-C
TB209A-4,to J212-D
1B209B-4 to P212-D
TB209A-; to J212-E
TB209B-5 to P212-E
TB209A~6 to J212-F
1B209B-6 to P212-F
1B209A-7 to J212~
1B209B-7 to P212-H
1B209A-8 to J212-J
TB209B-8 to P212-J
1B209A-9 to J212-K
TB209B-9 to P212-K
-NorEa
P and J212 can be connected in reverse. Hake sure the
letters match when rtasseabUng the guide pins.
Printed in U.5. America 3-9-62
For Fol'Dl 3747
Burrougbs - Series FfOOOInstruction Book
No. 1039
Sec. Vllr
PROCEDURE: (cont1d)
6. Remove TB209 and mount FMD" bracket in the same mount ing holes
,using two (2) 702,00i screws.
7.
Mount P2l2 to the 00" bracket, pin side down, using the screws
8.
Connect P212 and J212.
of P212. .
PARTS REQUIRED I
Reference
e
D
E
B
A
$~~.
1FX42-90
Quantity
1FX42-91
1FX67-20
FMD,S
702soot
24B Jo. 12
1
1
1
1
2
1
Description
P212
J212
Hood for J212
Bracket for mounting P212
ScreW"'f'or mounting FMD"
Double taper tab
S
__
ec_._V_I_I_I____Bll_r_r_ou--:::ghs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1040
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
Wrong product when multiple factor section is indexed.
~
7~----
CAUSE: K207, K208 and K209 picking at the same time due to a shorted
CR210, CR211 or CR212. (FX43-9, G Plate 66 dated 12-1-60 F2000
Symbol Book).
CORRECTION:
1. Replace the diodes in these positions
with FX43-13 diodes.
2. Add X429-383 resistor across the coil
of K207, K208 and K209 for arc suppression.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS~ This correction
should be made when the above condition
is. encountered •. The FX43-9 diode is no
longer available. Branch and grip stock
of this diode should be discarded.
INSTALLATION TIME: Approximately one hour is
required for this correction.
INCORPORATION DATE:
correction.
Machines above Fl25000P will incorporate this
PROCEDURE:
1. Solder the FX43-l3 diodes directly to the solder lugs of the old
diode clip holders with the cathode (as illustrated) on the end
which previously held the notched end of the cartridge type
diode. Hold the diode leads with pliers while soldering to
prevent heat damage to the diode.
2. Solder the resistors directly across the coils of the relays.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Sy!ubols
No. Req'd
FX43-13
X429-383
3
1
Unit List Price
Description
Diode
Resistor - 22K 1/2W
$
X
[
f
\
...
/
8-22-62
.
11
\I.~\ I
.. \
Printed in U.S. America Revised
I~)
."1/\Y
1.83
.05
\I'!??
.
.
For Form 3747
I
Sec. V:r:r:r
Burroughs
~. S~ri~s.
F20OQInst.ructior:rBook
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
CAUSE:
liOn" key wi l~ not latch down.
Failure of the "On"key solenoid and/or zener diode.
CORRECTION: Install new "On" key solenoid 2FB6l4-l3 (2300 ohms) and a
new zener diode lBX58-323. The new zener will drop 50v D.C. The
remainder of the input voltage will drop across the "On" key
solenoid.
The new solenoid can be identified
by the three (3) blue dots on the
body of the coil.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Install th is
correction when failure of either
the liOn" key solenoid or the zener
diode is experienced.
INSTALLATION TIME: Approximately one (1)
hour is required for this correction.
INCORPORATION DATE: Machines beginning
with serial number F134702P and
above will incorporate the new coil
and diode.
PROCEDURE:
PREVIOUS WIRING
TB204-B3(FB+1
Remove the old zener diode
and "Ohll key solenoid.
<./2. Assemble the new zener diode,
as shown, on the ARElOl
bracket~
Apply.a thin film
of S137 si lie one compound between the parts to ensure
proper heat transfer from the
lBX58-323 diode to the AHE10l
bracket.
1.·Mount the AHElOl bracket to
th~ relay plate in the forward
mounting hole for the replaced
diode, applying S137 silicone
compound between the bracket
and relay plate. Use an
X22,-686 screw, X275-135
washer, X27,-5 lockwasher and
Xl70-56 nut as illustrated.
REVISED WIRING
)(1'202-1 (1'8+1
"'1.
Printed in U.S. America 10-31-62
BI
AI
I
l8205
CR206
2
Tl!205-B~(GROUND)
TB202 BIO
(GROUND)
For Form 3747
Burroughs ..,
No,,- 1041
Serie~
F2000 Instruct ion. Book
Sec. VI:U
(Continued)
4. Make the following wiring changes:
/ a.
Remove wire from TB205-Bl (from L221-2) and, using 13. dot1ble
taper tab, connect it and the wir~ on TB205-B3 to TB20.5-B3.
v b. Remove wire from TB204-B3 (S229-NO) and using p. single taper
tab connect it to TB205-Bl.
v' c. Remove and discard wire from CR206-2 to TB2Q2-B10.
Note: On some late style machines which cP.n be identified
by two wires on CR206-2, remove and dJscard wire from
CR206-2 to J202-DD. Move remaining wire on CR206-2
(from K203-X2) to J202-DP.
vd. Remove wire on CR206 r l and connect to CR206..,2.
e. Add a new wire from CR206-l to XF202rl (fuse holder).
5. Install "Onll Key solenoid 2F86l4...,13 and mak~ nepessary aq.Justments per F2000 Instruction Book.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Reference
Symbol
Quantit~
Des9NriEtion
,
'
A
D
E
F
G
H
2FB614-l3
lBX58-323
(Includes B,
C, I, J, K, L)
ABElOl
X225-686
X275-135
X27,-5
X170-56
S137
1
1
"On" key so~enoid
Zener diode
1
1
1
1
1
BrGlcket
Screw
Washer
Lockwasher
Nut
Unit
~ist Prlc~
i fO
i
6.QO
2).25
.88
.04
.04
.04
.04
1 per branch silicone compound
TIUS CORRECTION CANCELS ITEM III OF CORRECTION INDEX 1001 (dated U-25-59)
AND ITEM III OF. CORRECTION INDEX 1005 (dated 2-8-60).
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book, .
No. 1042
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
Failing to multiply after installation of a new or rebuilt
component unit (2FMCllO-l) in any 18" carriage machine.
CAUSE:
The ground circuit for the right hand shifter L226 is changed
due to new wiring ih 22"side insertion panel machines.
CORRECTION: Add a wire from
P204-58 to T8205-B4 in all
18" carriage machines to provide a ground circuit for L226.
(This wire will not affect the
operation when the machine contains a component unit with the
original wiring.)
E225
SIDE INSERTION
WIRING (TO GNO)
58,~(----Ll
----(58:J
2
LZ26
T6207-2
,--'?4~---E226
Service replacement units that .L
-204
contain the new wiring are tagged. The tag indicates date of
Former wiring ----completion, 9-26-62 or later.
Present wiring •••••
Do not remove this tag from the
Added
wiring ~
unit.
S223 - NO
204
T6205-84
(GNOI
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: This change should be made at the next P.M.
attention or must be made whenever the component unit is replaced
with one containing the new wiring. (The machine Should be marked
indicating that this change has been made.)
INSTALLATION TIME:
Less than one hour is required for this correction.
INCORPORATION DATE:
All Side Insertion Panel machines incorporate the
change in wiring of L226. Service replacement component units after
9-26-62 are constructed with the new wiring.
PROCEDURE:
All 18" carriage machines:
A. Disassemble P204 and solder a wire (approx. 30 inches) to
P204-58.
B. With a double taper tab connect the other end of this wire
and the black wire on T8205-84 to T8205~B4.
CA.lJfION:
to the possibility of variations in the order of location of
TB204, T8205, and T8220, make sure tha t th is connect ion is made
to the correct board.
Due
NOl'E:
If it becomes necessary toinst:a.ll an early component unit in a
Side Insertion Panel machine, the unit can be modified as follows:
Printed in U.S. America 11-6-62
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1042
PROCEDURE:
A.
Sec.VIII'"
(Continued)
Remove wire on T8207-2 (to bomb tail connector E226 and
L226-2) and connect to J204-58. (Mark the unit indicating
that this change is made.)
Failure to make this change may result in the Right Hand
ShIfter occasionally cycling during a tr~sfer operation.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Symbol
M)02...,40
248 No. 12
Quantity
2!
1
ft.
Description
Wire
Double taper tab
Unit List Price
.04/ft.
.04 ea.
See. VIII
Burroughs - Series 12000 Instruction Book
No. 1043
CCRRECTION INDEX
CHANGE NanCE
~E
INSERI'ION' PANEL MACHINES
0Nq),
CaIDITION:
1. Failing to multiply or machine operating with carriage out of
stop position
Failing to set up a pre-multiply in a stop position containing
'
a DPM pin.
2. Blowing D.C. fuse when S287 (Sensimatic Drive Trip-zone 6A~
Logic Sch~matic) transfers.
CAUSEs
1. Shorted arc suppression diode At/:. (Zone
4A).
K24, not dropping due to ground circuit provided thru diode At/:.,
resistor 4B" L226, S287 (transfe~red) and K20l-l and 2.
'
K24,-6 and 7 always closed will allow L222 (machine trip) tob.
picked prematurely.
"
K24,-l and 2 open, will cause, loss of alternate hold for K20l.
2. Isolation dipdeCR2$O (Zone 6A.) shorted.
I
CCMECnQNI
1. Replace the two AEX43-1 diodes (A in illustration) located in
positions A6C and E6K on lFMCS7 printed circuit card with
FXS6-11 diodes.
. •..
2. Replace the AEX43-1 diode (B in illustration) located on the relay
plate with an FXS6-ll diode.
IWSTAUATION REQUIREMENTS: These diodes should be replaced on all f?ide
Insertion. panel machines as soon as possible •
;,.
INSTALLATION TIME:
Less than one hour is required for this correctfen.
IWCmpmATIOO DATE:
1. Machines above serial no. Fl)6S96P contain FX,6-lt' diodes in
positions At/:. and E6K.
2. Machinesahove serial no. Fl)S604P incorporate an FX~8-l1 diode
as CR2S0.
Printed in U.S. America 12-21-62
For Form .3747
No • . 1043
BurrouQhs - Series F'2000 Instruction Book
Sec.VII.'4
(Continued)
In replacing the diodes care should be taken to observe
polarity and not to damage the printed circuit card.
PROCEDURE:
PARTS REQUIRED:
Symbol
Quantity
Description
FX58-11
3
Diode
Unit List Price
1.13
Sec. VIII
Burroughs .. Series F2Q9?InstructionBook
CORRECTlON INDEX;
CONDITION: Machine malfunction due to operating out of stop position,
16" carriage 1/1011 tab machines only.
.
.
CAUSE: . Failure of drive trip interlocks to prevent machine
operation before the carriage
has settled in a stopposition.
CamECTIONI Install delaypic:k relay lFX47-46 (K245) -.nd· the
.Usted wiring changes. The
normally open contacts of K245
in' the. _chine trip and start
multiply circuits prev~~ ,
machine operation or start of
multiplication until K245 is
picked by In ~b Switch 227.
On any carriag~ m9vementof
more than two ipches, .the delay pick characteristic of
K245 (approx. 35-75 ms.) allows time for th, carriage
to settle dQWn before the
n~t machine function.
INSTAlLATloN REQUIREMENTS: This correcqpn should be installed 10Ihen the
above condition is encountered.
UISTAWTION TIMEI Approximately one hoor is required for this correction.
INC£RPOOATION OATE: Field modification only.· Side insertion panel ma ..
. chines incorporate a similar circuit for the same purpose.
PROCEDURE: The ~omplete relay plate may be removed to faciUtate the
following changes.
1
1. Mount the IFXA7-4B rel~y on the.FSTl6-1 bracket, and attach to
the right rear of the relay plate as shown in the illustration.
Discard the screw and nut removed. Tr~m the plastic cover at
point F.
2 •. Make the following wirin9 Cihange~ using single taper tabs at
the K245 connections and soldering all other connections.
(Continued)
Printed in U.S, America
12-26-62
For Form 3747
I
,
"
IA •. JOW...,
}_rr~e
,
"
::S«"l.s..F2000 x..'ttruC!to~ Bo~
.
:..
•
s.c. ··VlII
-
a.
,
Add 8 wI,.. £"CIII K24'S:t2\~;("
to T8202...810.
b. Add •. ,¥lretrCltK24S.Jtl
.....
toKlOl;'24. "
c. Reraov.v,lrCt trClll '. T9202-A6
(£rOlll J202...Fl Md' eCIMe<:t
to K2hS ..7 t
d. Add anev 1Ilr, trQll
T9202..6to ••$..6.
a. RelH,):ve"l... tr. K201..)
, (£raa J202-8B) anclccn.. ,
,8.
nect toK24S-S.
t. Add. ,a nev vlra, trQlt
K201 ...) to K2laS ..4.
,.ao'-IIIQ
1 . ,
1....
_AOPf,OWIRI"G
;on;:.;: Rf;lQt/IoTfP WilliS
, - - ... -JORNI:R \.,OCAT_
. -ca,tTIlilGWIIII""
PARTS REQUIRED.
Reter_e,",
Se,!!!t
QuM\tlt.1
A
1
8
C
1
1
D
E
G
1$
Bracket
Screw
1
1
Washer
Cover
Screw
Relay
1
W(re
1
,
Uoit List PrIce
P
Description
ft~
Zlnfil~
tap~r ta~::,·,,1''.':
'
b¢
I
Sec. VIII
Bu~roughs
- Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1045
CORRECTION INDEX
I
CONDITION: Wrong multiplication resulting in over nine or under one
in any column.
CAUSE: Pinion failing to advance on carry because of slipping nylon
clutch band FMA33.
... CORRECTION:
symbol.
Install redesigned pl.nl.on assembly 2FHA27; no change in
(Plate 31, dated 9-25-61, Series F2000 Symbol Book).
The nylon drum in the new assembly has cross grooves which are filled
with Alvania EP No.1 grease. The nylon band uses a stronger girth
spring Fx8o-l46 (no change in part number). With this design, foreign
matter is trapped in the grooves and a more constant clutch tension
is assured. Inspection of the nylon drums should be made on each P.H.
·to ensure presence of grease in grooves. Use only Alvania EP No.·l
when filling grooves (SF136).
These new sections can be identified by the gray color of the,pinion
shaft next to bronze bearing (i.n R, Plate 31) and/or theFMA33 clutch
band having only the numerals 2,4,6 and 8.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: Install this
correction when this condition is
encountered or as a Preventive
Maintenance measure.
INSTALLATION TIME:
INCORPORATION DATE:
Approximately 4 hours.
Machines beginning with No. F136463P •
. PROCEDURE:
A. Prior to removal of the multiplier package consider Item II of
this correction index.
B.
Removal of 2FMA27 lJinion assembly (Plate references, F2000 Symbol
Book, dated 12-1-60).
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the taper pin holding the drive gear on the left end
of the pinion shaft. (Part V, Plate 31)
Remove the taper pin holding the bearing bracket arm supporting the left end of the pinion shaft. (Part T, Plate 31)
Remove the pinion solenoid assembly. (Plate 35)
Remove the taper pin holding the dial indicator to the
camshaft and two screws for the pointer.
Printed in U. S. America
4-22-63
For Form
371.~7
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instrucition:Sook
No. 1045-2
PROCEDURE:
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
c.
Sec. VIII
(Cont'd)
Remove the dial indicator.
Remove the right side frame. Be careful not to damage L234
and its wires. Note location of shims, if any.
Remove the screws holding the two bearing brackets for the
pinion assembly pivot shaft to the carry circuit channel.
Remove clip from left end of pinion assembly pivot shaft and
disengage the pinion shaft from the right enclosed cam.
Remove the pinion assembly by moving it to the right, at the
same time slipping off the left bearing support arm and gear,
and disengage it from the left enclosed cam.
To install the new assembly follow the above procedure in reverse
order. Install shims FXl-32 and/or FXI-33 (S,P1ate 31) to provide
not more than .005 end play of pivot shaft (Q) and for carry cam
follower arms FMA2(D, Plate 33) to have at least 2/3 hold on carry
lobe.
Note:
Prior to test run, check all drive belts to be in good
condition and tightened to proper adjustment. Until the
new 2FMA27 assembly is "run in" it will increase the load
of the product accumulator. It may be necessary to increase the tension of the motor overload clutch. Adjust
as required"
PARTS REQUIRED:
Symbol
2FMA27
Quantit;y
Description
Pinion Assembly
1
Unit List Price
$356.13
II
CONDITION:
Wrong multiplication
~
under various amounts.
CAUSE: Clapper reset failure due to weak Fx8o-104 plunger springs
and/or worn clappers.
CORRECTION:
Install parts per test given under "Procedure".
INSTALLATION REQUIREMEN'fS: This should be done on all machines with
above condition and
a Preventive Maintenance measure.
as
INSTALLATION TIME: Approximately 4 hours to perform the procedure.
Corrective action for irregularities will vary.
Burpoughs' - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
No. 1045-3
INCORPORATION DATE: Stress relieved FxBo-I04 springs were used
beginning with machine no. F129941.
PROCEDURE:
1.
Prior to removal of Product Accumulator make the following test:
Manually cycle the unit to clapper reset position (approximately
30 0 or 2700 ) . In either position, manually pus~ each clapper
away from the core. Clapper should relocate freely against the
core when released.
Wear of the clapper at the pivot point or improper balance of
plunger and clapper springs can cause loss of reset. To correct;
replace worn clappers and all questionable FxBo-I04 plunger springs.
The FxBo-I04 springs are now stress relieved to retain proper
tension. Use the same clapper springs (FxBo-I06) unless they
have been altered or damaged.
2.
3.
Remove Product Accumulator and separate Drive Unit
Check the following items for wear.
a. Clapper reset rolls
b. Carry reset rolls
c. Total bail to be staked tight to its bearing hub
4.
Remove and clean carry wiper assembly as required.
5. Replace 2FMA27 pinion assembly, if required, using procedure
6.
7.
B.
9.
10.
under Item I of this C.I ••
Check tests and adjustments for Product Accumulator mechanisms
(Section III, F2000 Instruction Book, dated 12-1-62).
Replac~ any worn or defective parts in the Drive Unit.
Check
tests and adjustments under Drive Unit Assembly.
Reassemble Drive Unit to Product Accumulator and install in
machine.
Check carry reset and adjust if required. (The amount of reset
is not the same with the unit removed).
Check Test and Adjus~ments under "Transferring the Product;"
Section III of Instruction ~ook.
PARTS REQUIRED:
S;l!!!bol
~uantit;I
Fx80-104
FxBo-I06
lFMA51
20 per machine
As required
As required
Printed in U.S.America
DescriEtion
Plunger spring
Clapper spring
Clapper
4-22-63
Unit List Price
S .19
.25
1.46
For Form 3747
I
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No. 1046
CORRECTION INDEX
Information Only
I
Multiple Factor Storage
Beginning with machine number F137298p and Canadian number FI0632C, the
wiring for the M.F.S. feature is changed and uses a later style 2FMRl-l
Multiple Factor Storage unit. The later style 2FMRl-l provides for a 7
shift and a 5 shift to activate the middle section of the MC. With
early 2FMRl-l units, the 7 shift did not activate the feature. This
change primarily is to accommodate the rate change in F.I.C~A. deductions
from 3% (.03) to 3 5/8% (.03625).
The wiring schematic furnished with the machine will show if the machine
is wired for the early or late style FMRl-l unit. Order the units from
Parts Distribution as 2FMRl-l Early Style or 2FMRl-l Late Style.
Beginning with machine number F126931, the lane 41 sensing lever assembly
incorporates an eccentric to aid in adjusting the position of the wipers
on s260. In machines with this eccentric, the Multiple Factor Storage
feature (either early or late style) is indexed with a 1 pin instead of
the lA pin used previously. (See Page 19, Section III, Tests C37-6 and
C 37-5, and Page 3, Section V.)
II
Part Number Change..,.:)
I.
Make following change on Plate 43, dated 12-1-60, F2000 Symbol Book.
D described as "Included in AI" is part number Fx87-30. -;),:,v-",-
Part
This pin and the spring retainer ring FXIO-482 (part F) are used for replacement in both new and old style platen assemblies.
This information is supplied to provide the means of replacing a broken
platen spring (part E). Press the spring retainer ring onto the FX87-30
pin a distance equal to that of adjacent pins. It will be helpful to
slightly chamfer the end of the pin, but do not mar the end surface that
contacts the printed circuit disk.
III
Adjusting Side Insertion Panels
All side insertion control units are factory adjusted to pre-determined
height in a test fixture. This height setting should be very close to the
required adjustment in any machine, but it must b.e checked and refined if
~ecessary during shop checkout.
Once made in the machine, it should not be
necessary to readjust. However, the lateral alignment of the pins and tappets
must be checked and adjusted during checkout procedures. Refer to Page 45,
Section III, dated 12-1-62, Tests CIO-3-9, CIO-3-10, and CIO-3-27.
Printed in U. S. America
4-23-63
For Form 37~7
No. 1046-2
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec.· VIII
Slight lateral movement of the trays can be obtained within the tolerance
of the mounting inserts. Slightly loosen the screws holding the magazine
tray and move the tray in the direction required. The tray can also be
moved forward or rearward with the screws loose. The Auxiliary Sensing
Unit tappet block, and the lane switch assembly also can be moved laterally
to improve pin and tappet alignment.
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000Instruction Book
No. 1048
CORRECTION INDEX
CONDITION:
CAUSE:
A.
B.
A. Wrong multiplication
B. Machine locked
Worn components unit clutches causing:
Premature cycling of the product accumulator. This is evidenced
by marks on the platen side of the printed circuit disks indicating sensing of the disks while they are moving. However,
this could be caused also by a malfunctioning interlock switch.
Therefore, interlock switches and adjustments (Section III, Page .
27, dated 12-1-62, tests RlO-3, RIO-5 and RIO-6) should be checked first.
Failure of a components unit clutcn to fully detent in home .
position.
CORRECTION: Install improved clutch members.
The number of teeth and the tooth profile have been changed as illustrated
to provide greater contact area per
tooth which increases the reliability
and durability of the clutch.
OLD STYLE
INSTALLATION REQUlREMEN'I'S: Install the new
parts when wear of the clutch members
is encountered. Old style parts (12
teeth) are no longer available and
NEW STYLE
such parts in stock should ee discarded. Since new parts (8 teeth)
will n~t mate properly with the old ones, clutch members must be
ordered and replaced in pa~r£.
INSTALLATION TIME: Approximately one hour is required to repair one
clutch assembly.
INCORPORATION DATE: Improved clutches are incorporated in machines
beginning with serial F139949P.
PROCEDURE: If one or both function table clutches or one or both
shifter clutches are to be replaced, use the following procedure:
1. Remove the components unit.
2. Remove the corresponding components unit end plate.
3. Remove the screws holding the clutch shaft end bracket and remove the bracket.
4. Remove the clutch shaft. Observe the number and position of
clutch shaft shims.
5. Remove the pin and collar from the end of the shaft.
6. Remove and discard the old clutch members.
7. Install the new clutch members and reassemble the col1M:' and pin.
Printed in U. S. America 5-20-63
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
No, 1048
PROCEDURE:
8.
9.
Sec. VII!
(continued)
Check the driving clutch member to be free. If it is not free,
disassemble the pin and collar. Using a file or emery cloth, remove enough stock from the inside surface of the collar to permit
the clutch to turn freely and reassemble the pin and collar.
Reassemble the remaining parts in reverse order. Care should be
observed to have the printed circuit disk in the proper position
as the worm gear on the clutch shaft is remeshed with the nylon
gear on the disk. Refer to Section III, pages 28 and 29, dated
12-1-62, tests Rll-l, Rll-2 and Rll-7. If the gears are incorrectly meshed, it will be impossible to meet tests Rll-2 and
Rll-7without remeshingthem.
If both a function table clutch and a shifter clutch or all of
the clutches are to be replaced, disregard Step 2. Instead,
remove the three screws holding the clutch assemblies to the
front and/or back .plate and remove the front and/or back plate.
Continue the procedure as outlined above.
PARTS REQUIRED:
S:l!!!bol
15060692
15060700
15060734
15060742
15060759
15060767
Individual clutch members.
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Use
RHFT Clutch
II
IJIFT
RHS
"
IJIS
"
RHS
"
RHFT
"
IJIS,
"
LHFT
"
ReElaces
FMC27-l
FMC27-l
FHC27-2
FMC27-2
lFMC27-4
lFMC27-5
lFMC27-6
lFMC27-7
Unit List Price
24.00
23.00
15.00
16.00
13.00
11.00
The part number for a complete clutch shaft assembly-has not been changed.
Refer to the F2000 Symbol Book.
Important:
Initial orders should be for immediate minimum requirement
only and not for branch stock.
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
471
HELIABILITY IMPHOVEMENT NOTICE
File after "Correction Index" No. 1048
CONDITION: Wrong carriage movement or failure to trip drive after change
of schedules on machines equipped with side insertion panels.
CAUSE:
Program panel schedule selector not positioned properly.
CORRECTION: Install improved detent A. (replacing AJ,
plate 4-1, dated 8-13-62. Form 2947) when this condition occurs. The new detent is designed to hold the
. skip shaft and stop shaft securely in position when
oncedetented.
INSTALLATION TIME:
A
Less than one hour.
INCORPORATION DATE: The new detent was incorporated in machines beginning
with serial number F142588p.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Part No.
Description
15110356
Detent
Printed In U. s. Anlerln
10-9-63
Unit List Price
$
For Form 3747
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Seo. VIII
472
HELIABILITY IMPIH)V"fiNlENT
NOTICE
"1,,
J
CONDITION:
Carriage failing to tab or return ·orwrong carriage movement.
CAUSE: Gear box back plate, 2FGl12-4, broken at lower formed ear
allowing full or partial loss of driving force to the tab and return
clutches.
CORRECTION: Install improved back plate assembly 15025885, which has
the cutout at point E removed to correct this breakage. Installation of
the improved back plate requires removal of projection C from the gearbox
bottom plate and a slight change in spring arrangement.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
This correction must be
installed when the above
failure oocurs.
F
INSTALLATION TIME:
Approximately 4 hours
are required for this
correction.
INCORPORATION DATE:
Improved back plates
were inoorporated in
machines beginning
with Serial F14648LP.
PROCEDURE: This proC
cedure provides a method
of replacing the back plate
without removing the sensing
B
unit. As an optional procedure the
multiply package. sensing unit etc.
may be removed. In either case grinding off
of spring anchor projection C (illustrated) is
A
required.
1. Remove the carriage and carriage rails as a unit. Note
location of shims, if any.
2. Remove open-close slide and spearpoint.
3. Remove the linn section for access to grind off spring anchor projection C to allow easier removal of back plate. Rags should be used
to catch the filings.
4. Remove the escapement gear assembly.
5. Remove the four mounting screws for the gear box back plate.
6. Remove spindle drive shaft A by removing nut D and mounting screws B.
7. Remove primary and secondary latches.
Printed III U. S. I\lIleriea
1-13-64
For Form 3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
472
8.
9.
10e
11.
12.
13.
i4.
Sec. VIII
The following references are to figure 11-64 page 46 Section II
Series FIOOO Instruction Book, Form 3741, dated 6-1-61. Remove parts
W, AT, and AG. To remove AG, it is necessary to disconnect AG from
AM. This is accomplished by moving parts AF and Z rearward to allow
AM to be moved off the hub of AF. Discard the spring on part Z.
Remove the back plate by moving it upward, the top slightly to the left
and slowly pivoting the top rearward and the bottom forward.
With the back plate removed, mark eccentric AD figure 11-64 page 46
Section II Series FIOOO Instruction Book and replace the 49 1/2 nut
on this eccentric with the 20 No. 119 spring anchor and the 49 1/4
nut from the new assembly. The spring on part AG will connect to
this spring anchor and will do the additional job of the spring
discarded in step 8. The spring from AG to the spring anchor is the
same spring as that used from AG to the stud in the back plate.
Remove all parts from the new back plate assembly and transfer those
remaining on the old back plate (parts Z, AF and AM) to the new back.
plate.
NOTE: Use of these old parts will minimize the necessity of
readjustment. The complete assembled back plate is
furnished, howev"er, in the event parts on the old back
plate are worn, or damaged in removal.
Insert the new back plate but do not attach to gear box until drive
shaft A has been installed.
Reinstall the remaining parts in reverse order.
Check the gearbox adjustments as giv&~ on pages 44 thru 49 of Section
II Series FIOOO Instruction Book, dated 6-1-61.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Part Number
Description
15025885
Back Plate Assembly
Unit List Price
$
185.00
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series 1"2000 Instruction Book
473
Information Only
I
Total Bail Assembly
A repair part is now available
for replacement of part AO
(illustrated), eliminating
the necessity for replacing
the lFMA6 total bail assembly
due to shearing of part AO
from its hub. '1'his repair
part can be installed in
approximately two hours by
removing the left end plate
and the carry printed circuit
assembly of the Product Accumulator.
Removal of the carry printed circuit
the repair part to be tightly pinned to its shaft.
Part Number
Unit List Price
IFMA1.3
$
II
Interlock Switches in Components Unit
1'he arrangement of some of the rig;ht hanLi interlock switches has been
changed to reduce wrong multiplication due to failure of the switches
in the number one position (HlIS-I and RHE'T-l). These switches fail more
·frequently than those ill the other positions due to the more severe
actuation. 82 l t-6 is now located in the RHS-3 pOSition, s247 in the HHS-l
position, 8249 in the RHl<'T-l position and 13238 in the RHFT-2 position.
Failure of the switch in the number one position will now result in
failure to pick Multiplier Drive trip solenoid L230 rather than wrong
multiplication.
I
Sec. VIII
CONDITION:
Burroughs - Series F'2000 Instruction Book
Excessive noise or machine lock-up.
CAUSE: Loose horizontal belt due
to wear of bearing A (in left
auxiliary sideframe) and shaft
B (open-close drive shaft).
CORRECTION: Install improved
15025380 shaft assembly, which
can be identified either by red marking on belt pulley end or by dull
gray finish to shaft B. The bearing is available for service replacement under part number FX20-23.
INS'fALLATION REQUIREMEN'I'S:
this condition occurs.
INSTALLATION TIME:
This correction should be installed when
Less than one hour is required for this correction.
INCORPORATION DATE: Improved shaft assemblies \r{ere incorporated
beginning with Serial F149534P.
PROCEDURE:
Replace parts.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Part Number
Description
15025380
FX20-23
Shaft assembly
Bearing
Unit List Price
$
8.75
.07
I
p,-Inted in U. S. Amerka
It-lO-61~
For Form 3'1lJ'7
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
472.
RELIABILITY IMPROVEMENT NOTICE
CONDITION:
Machine fails to operate •.
CAUSE: Failure of machine trip switch s287, Fig. 111-10, F2000 Instruction Book, dated 12-1-62.
CORRECTION: Install IFX83-51 and two space washers FXIO-147 in place of
the lX83-34 for s287. The adjustment P19-1, Section III, Page 9, dated
12-1-62, F2000 Instruction Book is chanLjed to read .030" to .040"
clearance between ear E and the body of S287. The adjustment was .050"
to .060".
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: This correction should be installed when
this condition occurs and as a preventive maintenance measure.
INSTALLATION TIME:
INCORPORATION DATE:
Fl42106p.
Less than 1 hour.
The IFX83-51 was installed beginning with machine
PROCEDURE: Install IFX83-5l with the two washers between the switch
body and retaining clips. Adjust as required.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Part Number
Description
IFX83-51
FXIO-llf7
Switch
(2 required)
Space Washer
Unit List Price
$
2.20
.05
I
Pnnted In U, S. Anuu'\c"
1-13-65
For Form 3747
Sec. VIII
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
RELIABILITY IMPROVEMENT NOTICE
CONDITION:
One cent (.01) over on mUltiplication.
CAUSE: Failure to clear after round off due to tJurned spot on RiFSht
Hand Shifter Position Selector Disc S277 in position 21 at wiper AI.
The disc is damaged when Round Off Solenoid L23l picks as the disc moves
to position 21. This opens the circuit to Total Bail Solenoid L235.
CORRECTION: Make wiring changes
listed under Procedure. Replace
Shifter Disc assembly if necessary.
FF 202
A9'--7 46 )-----.5277.Al
204
.
ZONE 5
TB206
The wiring change will cause
ROlmd Off Release Solenoid L23l
to fire early in the multiply
cycle through K202 contacts 28
and 29. The circuit to L23l
from S277 in position 21 is removed to prevent burning S277.
B9
5240
ZONE 5
A2 .....--l...- .
TB20S
The isolation diodes in the circuits to S263 prevent bacl: circuits between product accumulntor
pinion solenoids during multiplication, if the wipers of
S263 are positioned to bridge
the pads.
---ADDED
'b::::l-'2.......___.... L225·2
Bl
)()(J()(~
ZONE 8
REMOVED
.. L231
R.O.REL
CR224
ZONE 8
Diode CR263 is for arc suppression to protect S2l2.
Diode CR264 (steps 11 thru 13) is required on Side ~nGertion Panel
machines only. It prevents a kickback voltage from K245 firing L23l
during a sensimatic operation if the C or 14 key iG used.. This could
result in breaking the lane 43 tappet during carriaGe tabulation.
INSTALLATION RE~UIREHENTS:
prevent this condition.
This change should be made to correct or
INSTALLATION TIME: Approximately 1 hour to make wlr:mg changes.
Approximately 4 hours if shifter disc assembly is. changed.
INCORPORATION DATE:
Field modification only.
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove wire from TB206-B9 to TB208-A2.
Printed in u. s. America
Revised 5-18-65
For Form '3747
I
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
476-2
Sec. VIII
PROCEDURE: (continued)
2. Add a wire from TB208-A2 to 8240 common.
3. Haunt TB236 on outside of TB201 with tabs facing up. The mounting
holes must be reamed.
Lf.
Remove tab from 8263-A and connect to TB236-6 (cathode, marked + on
CR260) •
5. Add a wire from TB236-5 (annode of CR260) to S263-A.
6. Remove tab from S263-B and connect to TB236-4.
7. Add a wire from TB236-3 to s263-B.
0
u.
Remove tab from S263-C and connect to TB236-2.
9. Add a wire from TB236-1 to S263-C.
~
M
>
A
~L
-7
B
6
TB236 4
C
K
f)
~ J
C
3
5
B
A
SELECTOR
LANE 43
w)-
v>-
Fig. 2
u)-
2
U{
S263
CLEAR POS.
AA ) -
-----------.--- ;
S262
R.O POS.
SELECTOR
i-JII
•••••• LANE 43
E
4
3
5
CR261
TB236
10.
Solder a AEx43-1 (CR263) across E201 and E202 with cathode (marked
+) on E202. See Figure VII-l2, Series F2000 Instruction Book,
dated 12-1-62.
The following steps are required only on Side Insertion Panel machines.
11.
~ 12.
r'
13.
Haunt TB237 on lower rear post of s260 switches assembly and connect
AEX43-1 diode (CR264) across the terminals.
Remove tab from S264-~ and connect to the annode (opposite + mark) of
CR264.
Add a wire from the cathode (+) of CR264 to S264E.
Burroughs - Series F2000 Instruction Book
Sec. VIII
476-3
. E=!
E
0
•
•
•
C
B
A
--1.-...-...
CR264
..-...04.....
S243·NC
ZONE 8
205 Z
TB237
•
•
•
S212
45°.72° 30'
PULSE TOTAL
BAIL
'----I. S240·NC
ZONE 8
I DEC SHIFT
I POS SELECTOR
E 201
~--_....
V
S274·A21
ZONE 9
Fig. 4
Fig. 3
PARTS REQUIRED:
PACKAGE NO.
16251027
Includes all parts shown below for one
machine. Available until 3-17-66.
Part Number
Description
AEX43-1 (2 required)
FX41-11
(10 required)
X42-1
24A No. 6
M3202-40 (approx. 6 ft.)
T.B. 236 (includes CR260,
CR261 t CR262)
CR263 , CR264
TB237
Single Taper Tab
Ring Tongue
Wire
Printed in U. S. America
Revised 5-18-65
IFSB4
Pkg. Price
, $ 9.25
Price Each
$
7.50
.96
.05
.05
.11
_01;
For Form 3747
Burrouliha
fiELD ENGINEERING TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
TO: IRANCHIDISTRICT fiELD ENGINEERING MANAGERS
SUBJECT:
F2000, E2000
NO.
2004
F'ftOM: QROUP __
1_1_ __
SPLIT PLATEN SPACING LOCK-UP
This occurs when the left and/or right actuating arm lowers during a spacing operat
and the space bail restores, jamming the small stud on the toggle on top of the IO~
actuating arm. This prevents the space bail from restoring to normal and also prevents a drive trip.
A temporary solution is to weld a #5 control pin to the actuating arm, thereby
increasing its length so that it cannot be trapped under the stud on the toggle.
Burroughs
FIELD ENGINEERING
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
~ELlABILITY
SYSTEM SERIES
'"N
~ MPROVEMENT
F2000
STYLE/MOOEL
No.
3747-007
REVISED
PAGE
All
1
OF
2
TOP UNIT NO.
OOOTICE
INCORPORATION DATE
UNITS AFFECTED
6-14-65
Below F159904P
STD. INSTALL. TIME
UNIT DESCRIPTION
Carriage Drive Clutch
INSTALLATION PACKAGE NO, AND PKG, PRICE
Approx. 1 hour
DATE
5-10-66
TITLE
. Faul ty Electro Magnetic Clutch
CONDITION: Faulty electro magnetic clutch 3FG252-1 or 1502 5414
(part C Plate V-II, F2000 Parts Catalog, dated 2-3-64).
CORRECTION:
Install permanent magnet clutch as outlined below.
POOCEDURE:
1. For all F2000 rear insertion panel machines, install clutch
1502 7279 and parts listed below.
2. For all side insertion panel machines, install clutch 1502 8103
and parts listed below.
NOTE: The only difference between the FIOOa and E20aO
permanent magnet clutch is the pre-set torque
adjustment and the parts on outer shaft, which
are interchangeable.
3. For either clutch used, replace the outs ide pulley or sprocket
with pulleys 1502 8541 and 1502 8533, key 1502 8525, spacer
1502 8517 and the lock washer and nut that was removed.
4. The IFX29-35 pulley is used on the inside shaft of the clutch
in place of the sprocket if belt driven tab and return is
required. The IFX29-35 is drilled for a pin and also cut
for a keyway. Use parts removed to retain the pulley on
the shaft.
5.
Remove the slip ring brushes and brush holders. No other
electrical changes are required.
~ TO TEST:
'.
V
1.
Remove all horizontal
chains or belts from
the left driving
sprockets.
2. Loop a string around
one of the nuts
on screws C and
rotate the
clutch until
'2 or 3
wraps
have
been
made around the outer circumference as
illustrated.
Changes or additions since last issue.,
3747 Sec. VIII
FOR F.E. TECHNICAL MANUAL FORM
PRINTED IN U.S. AMERICA
I
RIN NO. 3747-007 REVISED
Page 2 of 2
3.
4.
J TO
Block th~ movement of clutch output chain at A.
Attach a 0-32 oz. scale (1623 0609) as illustrated and
pull evenly towards the rear of machine. The output
torque should be 16 to 17 oz. for rear insertion machines;
18 to 19 oz. for side insertion.
The output torque
should never be adjusted to exceed 19 02.
AillUST:
J Caution:
Loosen screws C and rotate center ring B a few
thousandths forward or rearward and recheck output
torque.
rection to move center ring to
ust
to rque on unmarked clutches cannot be dete rmined.
Later clutches will be marked with an arrow indicat
to rque).
direction to turn ri09to decrease ou
Permanent magnet clutches are constructed having
.008 to .015 air gap between magnetized
and
disks. To retain the proper air gap when making
the output torque adjustment, the four screws
must be torqued down evenly.
PARTS REQUIRED:
Order permanent magnet c1utches separately for machine having
either side or rear insertion panel, as they will not be
included in parts package listed below.
Unit
Number
List
Price
Desc ription
~
1502 7279
Permanent magnet clutch for
1
$ 100.00
rear insertion panel machine
1502 8103
Permanent magnet clutch for
1
114.00
side insertion panel machine
1625 3510 PARTS PACKAGE NO.
(includes one set of the
Number
1502 8533
1502 8541
1502 8525
1502 8517
Desc ription
Pulley
Pulley
Key
Spacer
(Pkg. Price $16.24)
parts:)
fol16~ing
lli.l.:..
1
1
1
1
Uni t
List Price
$ 7.25
6.65
.54
1.80
The following additional parts are required to install a
permanent magnet clutch on machines having belt driven tab
and return.
(These parts are not included in above parts package).
Number
IFX29-35
1625
Desc ription
Belt Pulley
Washe r
Unit
List Price
$ 7.25
.18
Burroughs
~ELlABILITY
~ MPROVEMENT
FIELD ENGINEERING
TECHNICAL OPERATIONS
No.
SYSTEM SERIES
F2000
*
See Below
3747-008
1
0'
1
f-------------~-- '-----'---~-"~-'-'
TOP UNIT NO.
OOOTICE
~"","".,..,.,.,:--=-:,..,....,..--=.,..,..-::-_--._-::--L-
STD. INSTALL. TIME
Approx. 1 Hour
TITLE
*
_ _ _ _ _ _-I-,-,--=-=-=-::-::-::-:-::--=--:-:-_._____
IUNITS AFFECTED
Below F159904P
Machine
._-
--- -- -------.-
UNIT DESCRIPTION
Electro Magnetic Clutch
MalfunctionsTDATE-~-=~~_~~_ . ,_.A
F2000 with Electro Magnetic Clutch 3FG252-1.
CONDITION:
Wrong multiplication or erratic carriage movement o
CAUSE: Outside belt pulleys on electro magnetic clutch worn
causing belt slippage.
CORRECTION:
1502 8798.
Install service replacement pulleys 1502 8988 and
This eliminates the necessity of installing a complete permanent
magnet clutch.
PARTS REQUI RED:
Unit
List
Price
--------
Description
1502 8988
1502 8798
Inside belt pulley
Outside belt pulley
1
1
$
7.25
7.25
I
PRINTED IN U.S. AMERICA
3747 Sec. VIII
FOR F.E. TECHNICAL MANUAL FORM _ - , -_ _ _ _ _'
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2015:07:06 12:55:59-08:00 Modify Date : 2015:07:06 12:49:24-07:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Metadata Date : 2015:07:06 12:49:24-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:d9d4c228-86c0-e443-a0f0-dcc35a9f18ee Instance ID : uuid:a76594b7-56af-c846-af30-348aa9744bdb Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 218EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools